Mitsubishi Electric Sanda Works NR172UHS Multimedia Car Radio with Bluetooth transceiver User Manual Instruction manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1811347
Application ID	fbZKS3C/lxOJoR6AqEOwLg==
Document Description	Instruction manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	414.92kB (5186531 bits)
Date Submitted	2012-10-10 00:00:00
Date Available	2012-10-26 00:00:00
Creation Date	2010-09-07 16:42:29
Producing Software	Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2010-09-07 16:42:29
Document Title	Instruction manual
Document Creator	XSL Formatter V4.3 MR8a (4,3,2009,0731) for Windows
Document Author:	Owner: y.io.creator

COMAND Online
Supplement
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only
Symbols
YY
(Y page)
Display
Warning
Environmental note
Possible vehicle damage
Tip
Instruction
Continuation symbol
Page reference
Displays in the multifunction display/COMAND
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you drive off, familiarise yourself with
your COMAND control panel and read this
manual. This will help you to obtain the maximum pleasure from your COMAND control
panel and to avoid endangering yourself and
others.
Depending on the model and equipment level,
the functions and equipment of your
COMAND control panel may deviate from
some descriptions and illustrations.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its systems to the state of the art and therefore
reserves the right to introduce changes in
design, equipment and technical features at
any time.
You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the
data, illustrations or descriptions in this manual.
Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre if you have any questions.
This manual is an integral part of the vehicle.
You should always keep it in the vehicle and
pass it on to the new owner if you sell the
vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
1725840781Z102 É1725840781Z102YËÍ
Contents
Index ....................................................... 4
At a glance ........................................... 13
Introduction ......................................... 11
System settings .................................. 41
Navigation system .............................. 49
Telephone .......................................... 111
COMAND Online and Internet .......... 149
Audio .................................................. 185
Video .................................................. 225
Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 243
4
Index
Access data of the mobile phone
network provider
Deleting ......................................... 157
Editing ........................................... 157
Making entries ............................... 155
Selecting ........................................ 152
Active partition (USB devices only)
Selecting ........................................ 202
Address book
Browsing ........................................ 140
Calling up ....................................... 140
Changing an entry .......................... 142
Connecting a call ........................... 143
Creating an entry ........................... 141
Deleting an entry ........................... 141
Details about an entry ................... 142
Importing contacts ........................ 145
Searching for an entry ................... 141
Starting route guidance ................. 143
Voice tag ....................................... 144
Address book entry
Adopting as a home address ............ 92
Showing the details ....................... 142
Address entry menu ............................ 53
Alternative route ................................. 82
Area
Avoiding ......................................... 103
Audio AUX jack .................................. 223
Audio CD/DVD or MP3 mode
Switching on .................................. 196
Audio DVD
Pause function ............................... 251
Stop function ................................. 198
Audio format
Setting (audio DVD mode) ............. 202
Automatic disconnection
Setting the length of time .............. 157
Autostore ........................................... 190
AUX jacks
CD/DVD drive ................................. 37
Back button ......................................... 17
Bird's-eye view .................................... 98
Bluetooth®
Activating/deactivating ................... 46
External authorisation .................... 116
General information ......................... 46
Interface ........................................ 114
Settings ........................................... 46
Telephony ...................................... 114
Bluetooth® audio basic display ........ 216
Bluetooth® audio device
Reconnecting ................................. 214
Bluetooth® audio devices
Connecting .................................... 212
Bluetooth® audio mode
Switching on .................................. 215
Bluetooth® device list ....................... 213
Bluetooth® interface telephony
Conditions ..................................... 114
Bluetooth® telephones list ............... 115
Buttons on the COMAND controller .......................................................... 17
Call
Accepting ......................................
Connecting ....................................
Rejecting .......................................
Call list
Opening and selecting an entry .....
Saving an entry in the address
book ..............................................
Call lists .............................................
Displaying details ...........................
Storing an entry which has not yet
been stored ...................................
Category list (music search) ............
CD
Copy protection .............................
Disc ...............................................
General information .......................
Multisession ..................................
Playback options ...........................
Selecting a medium .......................
Selecting a track ............................
CD/audio DVD or MP3 mode
Switching on (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ................................
123
124
123
134
134
133
134
134
205
205
205
205
203
203
198
199
249
Index
CD/DVD
Ejecting (DVD drive) ....................... 194
Ejecting (DVD single drive) ............ 193
Ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment
System) ......................................... 249
Inserting (DVD changer) ................ 193
Inserting (DVD single drive) ........... 193
Inserting (Rear Seat Entertainment System) ................................ 248
Changing direction
Announcement phase ...................... 76
Change of direction phase ............... 76
Preparation phase ............................ 75
Character entry ................................... 25
Characters
Entering ........................................... 28
COMAND
Basic functions ................................ 29
Components .................................... 14
Switching on/off .............................. 29
COMAND controller ............................. 17
COMAND control panel ....................... 15
COMAND display ................................. 19
Cleaning instructions ....................... 21
Setting ............................................. 42
Switching on/off .............................. 30
COMAND Online
Importing POIs ............................... 168
Settings ......................................... 183
COMAND Online and Internet
Ending the connection ........... 158, 159
Establishing the connection ........... 158
Manually setting the access data
of the mobile phone network provider .............................................. 153
Selecting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider ..... 152
COMAND operating system ................ 14
Compass function ............................. 106
Connecting a USB device ................. 196
Convenience telephony .................... 119
Copy protection (CD/DVD) ............... 205
Country
Selecting .......................................... 54
Crosshair position
Saving .............................................. 97
Data carrier
Audio DVD ..................................... 203
MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 208
Date format
Setting ............................................. 43
Delete button ....................................... 18
Deleting
Call lists ......................................... 136
Destination
Adopting from the list of previous
destinations ..................................... 94
Assigning a destination to an
address book entry .......................... 94
Destination entry
Special destination .......................... 66
Using geo-coordinates ..................... 62
Destination information ..................... 83
Destination input ................................. 53
Address ........................................... 53
Destination memory ........................ 59
Intermediate stop ............................ 62
Last destination ............................... 60
Map ................................................. 61
destination memory ............................ 92
Destination memory
Deleting an entry ............................. 95
My address ...................................... 92
Storing a destination ........................ 93
Digital map
Updating ........................................ 107
Digital TV channels
Programme preview ....................... 231
Disc
CD/DVD ........................................ 205
MP3 ............................................... 203
Displaying the track and album ....... 202
Distance
see Route overview
DTMF tones
Sending ......................................... 127
DVD
Copy protection ............................. 205
Disc ............................................... 205
Selecting a track ............................ 199
DVD menu .......................................... 236
DVD playback conditions ................. 233
6
Index
Dynamic route guidance ..................... 88
Emergency call (999 or 112) ............ 113
Entering characters
In navigation mode .......................... 25
In the address and the phone
book ................................................ 27
Using the number pad ..................... 26
Entering the town ................................ 54
Entry
Deleting ........................................... 26
Saving .............................................. 29
Selecting ........................................ 131
Example: entering an address ............ 53
Example display
Audio CD mode .............................. 197
MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 208
Example of operation .......................... 24
Fast forward
CD/DVD mode .............................. 200
Favourites (Internet) ......................... 180
Favourites button ................................ 47
Favourites buttons .............................. 18
First list entry
Accepting ......................................... 26
Frequency entry
Manual ........................................... 189
Function restrictions
Using the telephone ....................... 113
Video DVD mode ........................... 233
Google™ POI search
All search queries ..........................
Free text search .............................
Importing a POI ..............................
Selecting the search position ........
Top search queries ........................
Using a POI as the destination .......
Gracenote Media Database ..............
Hands-free microphone
Switching on/off ........................... 125
Harman/kardon® Logic 7® Surround Sound system ........................... 32
Home address ...................................... 92
Entering and saving ......................... 57
Selecting from the destination
memory ........................................... 59
Indicator lamp
Remote control ................................ 38
Individualisation
Activating/deactivating ................... 46
Intermediate stop
Deleting ........................................... 63
Entering ........................................... 62
Internet
Calling up the carousel view .......... 174
Entering the URL ............................ 174
Favourites manager ....................... 181
Favourites menu ............................ 182
Menu functions .............................. 178
Opening favourites ......................... 179
Internet access
Conditions ..................................... 150
Internet access data
Selecting/setting ........................... 151
iPod®
Alphabetic track selection ............. 222
Connecting to Media Interface ...... 218
Selecting a category/playlist ......... 221
iTunes® ............................................... 222
166
163
165
164
166
165
201
Lane recommendations ...................... 77
Explanation ...................................... 79
Presentation .................................... 79
LINGUATRONIC
Settings ........................................... 44
List as selection list
Calling up ......................................... 27
List of access data
New provider ................................. 154
Index
List of mobile phone network providers
Calling up .......................................
Empty ............................................
With the selected provider .............
Load/eject button .............................
Logic 7®
see harman/kardon® Logic 7®
surround sound system
151
152
153
193
Map
Arrival time/distance to destination ................................................ 100
Calling up ......................................... 61
City model ..................................... 102
Map settings .................................... 97
Moving ....................................... 61, 97
RDS-TMC displays ............................ 88
Showing geo-coordinates .............. 100
Showing road names ..................... 100
Showing the map data version ....... 106
Topographic map ........................... 101
Map information .................................. 99
Map orientation ................................... 98
Map scale
Setting ............................................. 96
Media Interface
Basic menu .................................... 219
Connection options ....................... 218
iPod® ............................................. 218
Mode ............................................. 218
Notes for the MP3 player ............... 222
Selecting music files ...................... 220
Switching on .................................. 219
USB mass storage device .............. 218
Media list ........................................... 198
Menu
Exiting .............................................. 33
Hiding/showing (TV mode) ............ 228
Showing ................................... 51, 234
Special destinations ......................... 66
System settings ............................... 21
Menu item
Selecting .......................................... 23
Menu overview
COMAND ......................................... 20
Mercedes-Benz Contact .................... 147
Mobile phone
Authorisation ................................. 115
Authorising .................................... 115
Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) . 114
Connecting (convenience telephony) ............................................... 119
De-authorisation ............................ 118
External authorisation .................... 116
Motorway information ...................... 101
MP3
Bit/sampling rates ......................... 204
Copyright ....................................... 204
Disc ............................................... 203
File systems ................................... 203
Formats ......................................... 204
Selecting a medium ....................... 198
Multifunction display
Lane recommendations ................... 80
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 22
Selecting a TV channel .................. 229
Using the telephone ....................... 131
Multisession CDs ............................... 203
Music Register
Copying music data ....................... 209
MUSIC REGISTER
Deleting all music files ................... 210
Memory space info ........................ 210
Playback options ........................... 211
Switching on .................................. 208
Music search ..................................... 205
My address .......................................... 92
Navigation announcements
Switching off .................................... 81
Navigation menu
Showing/hiding ..................... 227, 234
Navigation mode
Switching on .................................... 51
North up orientation ........................... 98
Off-map ................................................ 87
Off-road ................................................ 87
Options menu (COMAND Online) ..... 159
8
Index
Orientation in direction of travel ....... 98
Passcode
Entering ......................................... 116
Pause function ................................... 197
Personal special destination
Selecting as the destination ............. 74
Personal special destinations
Displaying on the map ..................... 71
Managing categories ........................ 72
Saving .............................................. 73
Settings ........................................... 71
Visual information ............................ 72
Phone book
Adding a number to an address
book entry ..................................... 133
Calling up ....................................... 128
Creating a new entry ..................... 132
Deleting an entry ........................... 132
Symbol overview ............................ 130
Phone book entry
Searching ...................................... 130
PIN
Entering ......................................... 119
Playback options .............. 203, 211, 222
Previous destinations ......................... 95
Radio mode
Radio Data System ........................ 191
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
Switching on .................................. 186
Radio station
Storing ........................................... 190
RDS
Switching off .................................... 30
Switching on/off ........................... 191
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 191
Interrupting an announcement ...... 192
RDS-TMC
Example message ............................ 91
Selecting messages ......................... 89
Read-aloud function
Automatic ........................................ 91
Read-aloud speed
Setting ............................................. 44
Rear-compartment screens ................ 35
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Adjusting the sound settings ......... 246
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 248
AUX mode ...................................... 264
Changing the batteries .................. 244
Changing the picture format .......... 247
Setting the brightness ................... 246
Setting the colour .......................... 246
Setting the contrast ....................... 246
Several users ................................. 246
System settings ............................. 247
TV mode ........................................ 253
Using headphones ......................... 245
Using the main loudspeaker .......... 245
Video DVD mode ........................... 257
Wireless headphones ....................... 38
Recording the route
Turning off from the route on the
map ................................................. 86
Redials ................................................ 124
Remote control
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..... 36
Reset .................................................... 48
Rewinding
CD/DVD mode .............................. 200
Route
Calculating ....................................... 56
Estimated time of arrival .................. 83
Recording ........................................ 85
Route overview ................................ 84
Route calculation
Starting ............................................ 56
Route display ....................................... 84
Route guidance .................................... 75
Cancel ............................................. 80
Continue .................................... 80, 81
Destination reached ......................... 81
Lane recommendations ................... 77
Off-road ........................................... 87
Route options
Setting ............................................. 52
Route overview .................................... 84
Route type
Setting ............................................. 52
Index
Safety notes
Audio CD/DVD and MP3
mode ..................................... 192, 248
Using the telephone ....................... 112
Video DVD mode ........................... 232
Screen
Selecting for remote operation ........ 36
SD memory card
Ejecting .......................................... 196
Inserting ........................................ 196
Selecting options (COMAND
Online)
POIs download ............................... 162
POI search ..................................... 159
Restoring the settings .................... 163
Weather display ............................. 160
SMS
Notes and requirements ................ 137
Sound
Switching on/off .............................. 30
Sound settings ..................................... 31
Special destination
Category .......................................... 68
Defining the position for the special destination search ..................... 67
Entering ........................................... 66
Entering using the map .................... 70
Special destination icon
Setting ............................................. 98
Special destination list ....................... 68
With character bar ........................... 70
Speed dial list
Storing a phone book entry in the
speed dial list ................................ 136
Speed Limit Assist ............................ 103
see Speed Limit Assist
Station list ......................................... 188
Station pre-sets ................................. 189
Stations
Saving ............................................ 190
Tuning in ........................................ 188
Station search ................................... 189
Storage options
Selecting .......................................... 94
Summer and standard time
Switching ......................................... 43
Surround sound ................................... 32
System language
Setting ............................................. 47
Telephone
Accepting or rejecting a waiting
call ................................................. 126
Ending an active call ...................... 126
Entering phone numbers ................ 124
Incoming call ................................. 123
Making a call ................................. 126
Making a call via speed dial ........... 125
Outgoing call ................................. 123
Sending DTMF tones ...................... 127
Single call ...................................... 125
Switching hands-free microphone
on/off ............................................ 125
Toggling ......................................... 126
Telephone basic menu
Bluetooth® interface ...................... 118
Convenience telephony ................. 120
Telephone mode
Redialling ....................................... 124
Telephone number
Entering ......................................... 123
Teletext .............................................. 232
Text message (SMS)
Call sender .................................... 139
Inbox .............................................. 138
Reading .......................................... 138
Reading aloud ................................ 138
Storing sender in address book ..... 139
Text messages
Deleting ......................................... 140
Time
Setting ............................................. 43
Time format
Setting ............................................. 43
Time zone
Setting ............................................. 43
Tone settings
Balance and fader ............................ 31
Treble and bass ............................... 31
Track
Selecting ........................................ 250
Track information .............................. 252
10
Index
Traffic announcements on ............... 191
Traffic-dependent route guidance
see Dynamic route guidance
Traffic jam function ............................. 82
Traffic jam icon
Showing on route ............................. 89
Traffic jam message
Reading out on route ....................... 91
Traffic jams
Showing in the map ......................... 88
Traffic Programme
Switching traffic announcements
on/off ............................................ 191
Traffic reports
Reading out on route ....................... 91
Showing in the map ......................... 88
Showing on route ............................. 89
Transferring a call (convenience
telephone) .......................................... 128
Treble and bass
Adjusting ......................................... 31
TV
Picture settings .............................. 226
TV basic settings
Channel fix ..................................... 231
Setting the reception region .......... 232
TV channel
Setting ........................................... 228
Storing ........................................... 230
TV mode
Notes on the channel list ............... 228
Reception quality ........................... 227
Switching on .................................. 227
Using the telephone .......................... 123
vCards
Receiving .......................................
Video DVD
Fast forward/rewind ......................
Operation .......................................
Pause function ...............................
Picture settings ..............................
Selecting ........................................
146
235
232
235
226
236
Selecting a film/title ...................... 236
Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 235
Stop function ................................. 235
Video DVD mode
Automatic picture shutoff .............. 226
Switching on .................................. 233
Volume
Adjusting ......................................... 30
Navigation announcements ............. 30
Phone calls ...................................... 31
Traffic announcements .................... 30
Waveband
Switching (radio) ............................ 187
Waypoints
Accepting waypoints for the route ... 65
Editing .............................................. 65
Entering ........................................... 63
Weather display (COMAND Online)
Calling up the weather map ........... 172
Information chart ........................... 169
Selecting the location .................... 170
Switching off .................................. 170
Switching on .................................. 169
Weather map (COMAND Online)
Legend ........................................... 173
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 172
Switching the weather information display on/off ......................... 173
Website
Add to favourites ........................... 179
Introduction
Operating safety
General notes
G Risk of accident
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions.
Only use COMAND or the telephone when the
road and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that, at a speed of only
50 km/h, your vehicle covers a distance of
nearly 14 m per second. The navigation system will not provide you with information
about stop signs, give-way signs, traffic regulations or road safety features. It is up to you
to pay attention to these while driving the
vehicle. Only enter a new destination when
the vehicle is stationary.
COMAND has a radio included as part of the
audio functions.
This radio receiver is suitable for operation by
all persons in accordance with the valid EC
directive.
The device conforms to currently applicable
European or harmonised national standards.
Therefore, adherence to the relevant specifications for electromagnetic compatibility is
guaranteed for this device.
As a result, interference caused by your
equipment with other electrical/electronic
equipment and interference with your equipment caused by other electrical/electronic
equipment can be largely prevented.
The equipment is approved by the vehicle
manufacturer in accordance with European
Automotive EMC Directive 95/54/EC. Therefore, operation according to its intended purpose is approved for your vehicle. The equipment does not require certification.
It complies with device-specific EMC requirements according to the following European
standards:
REN
REN
55013
55020
Correct use
Observe the following information when using
COMAND:
Rthe
safety notes in this manual
road traffic regulations
Rnational
i Improper work on electronic components
or other systems (such as radio, DVD
changer) and their software may result in
malfunction or failure. Even systems that
have not been modified could be affected
because the electronic systems are connected. Electronic malfunctions can seriously jeopardise the operational safety of
your vehicle.
i Only have work or changes to electronic
components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
the work required. Daimler recommends
that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Protection against theft: this device is
equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on
protection against theft can be obtained
from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Information on copyright
Macrovision™
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology
must be authorised by Rovi Corporation, and
is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorised by
Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
11
12
Introduction
libJPEG
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
Free Type
Portions of this software are copyright © 2005
The FreeType Project http://
www.freetype.org.
All rights reserved.
NetFront™
This product contains NetFront Browser software of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright ©
1996-2010 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights
reserved.
The NetFront Browser software is based in
part on the work of the Independent JPEG
Group.
Camellia
Copyright © 2006, 2007 NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation).
All rights reserved.
The conditions and disclaimers in connection
with use of Camellia are available at http://
info.isl.ntt.co.jp/crypt/eng/index.html.
Flash® Lite™
This product contains Flash® Lite™ technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated. This
product contains Adobe® Flash® player software under license from Adobe Systems
Incorporated, Copyright © 1995-2010 Adobe
Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
reserved. Adobe and Flash are registered
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
in the United States and/or other countries.
Vehicle equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment for your
vehicle, as available at the time of going to
press. Country-specific deviations are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be
equipped with all features described. This
also applies to safety-relevant systems and
functions. Therefore, the equipment on your
vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase
contract documentation for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehicle.
Contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if
you have any questions about equipment or
operation.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some COMAND functions
are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle
is in motion. You will notice this, for example,
because either you will not be able to select
certain menu items or COMAND will display
a message to this effect.
COMAND operating system ...............
Multifunction steering wheel .............
Operating COMAND ............................
Basic functions of COMAND ...............
Climate control status display ...........
Rear Seat Entertainment System ......
Reversing camera ...............................
14
22
22
29
33
34
39
At a glance
13
14
COMAND operating system
Components of COMAND
At a glance
COMAND operating system
COMAND consists of:
Overview
Rthe
COMAND display
COMAND control panel with a single
DVD drive or DVD changer
Rthe COMAND controller
Rthe back and delete buttons
Rup to two favourites buttons (ML), depending on the vehicle equipment
You can use COMAND to operate the following main functions:
Rthe
Rthe
system settings
navigation system
Rthe telephone with text message function
and the address book
RCOMAND Online and Internet
Rthe audio function in the following modes:
radio and DAB radio mode, disc (audio CD/
DVD and MP3 mode), memory card (MP3
mode), MUSIC REGISTER, USB storage
device, Media Interface and Bluetooth®
audio
Rthe video function in TV, video DVD and
video AUX modes
You can call up the main functions:
Rthe
Rusing
ML example
Function
Page
COMAND display
19
COMAND control panel
with a single DVD drive or
DVD changer
15
COMAND controller
Back button (left)
Delete button (right)
Favourites button (left)
Favourites button (right)
17
17
18
18
18
the corresponding function buttons
Rusing the main function bar in the COMAND
display
COMAND operating system
15
At a glance
COMAND control panel
Function
Switches to radio mode
Switches wavebands
Switches to DAB radio
mode
Switches to navigation
mode
Shows the menu system
Press h repeatedly
• Switches to audio CD,
audio DVD and MP3 mode
or DVD video mode
• Switches to memory card
mode
• Switches to MUSIC REGISTER
• Switches to USB storage
device mode
• Switches to Media Interface or audio AUX mode
• Switches to Bluetooth®
audio mode
Function
Page
186
187
186
51
51
196
196
208
196
219
215
Calls up the telephone
basic menu:
• Bluetooth® interface telephony
• Convenience telephony
SAP telephony; see the separate operating instructions.
Load/eject button
8 Single DVD drive
V DVD changer
Selects a station using the
station list (FM and DAB
radio mode)
Selects a station using the
station search function
Rewind
Selects the previous track
Disc slot
• To load CDs/DVDs
• To eject CDs/DVDs
• To update the digital map
Page
118
120
193
193
188
189
200
199
193
194
107
16
COMAND operating system
At a glance
Function
Selects a station using the
station list (FM and DAB
radio mode)
Selects a station using the
station search function
Fast forward
Selects the next track
Delete button
• Deletes characters
• Deletes an entry
Number keypad
• Selects stations via the
station presets
• Stores stations manually
• Mobile phone authorisation
• PIN entry (convenience
telephony)
• Telephone number entry
• Sends DTMF tones
• Character entry
• Selects a location for the
weather forecast from the
memory
z Displays the current
track being played
g Selects stations by
entering the frequency
manually
g Selects a track
Page
188
189
200
199
Function
Switches COMAND on/off
Adjusts the volume
SD memory card slot
Calls up the system menu
24
PIN confirmation (convenience telephony)
Accepts a call
Dials a number
Redials a number
Accepts a waiting call
119
123
124
124
126
26
26
189
190
115
119
123
127
25
170
202
189
199
Page
Mute
Switches the hands-free
microphone on/off
Cancels the text message
read-aloud function
Switches off the traffic and
navigation announcements
Rejects a call
Ends an active call
Rejects a waiting call
29
30
196
30
125
138
138
123
126
126
COMAND operating system
In the instructions, operating sequences are
described as follows:
Press the $ button.
Radio mode is activated.
X Select Radio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Confirm Station list by pressing W.
The station list appears.
ML example
: COMAND controller
You can use the COMAND controller to select
the menu items in the COMAND display.
You can call up menus or lists, scroll through
menus or lists and exit menus or lists.
Buttons on the COMAND controller
Overview
ML example
: Back button
; Delete button
Operating the COMAND controller (example)
The COMAND controller can be:
Rpressed
briefly or pressed and held W
Rturned clockwise or anti-clockwise cVd
Rslid left or right XVY
Rslid forwards or back ZVÆ
Rslid diagonally aVb
= Favourites button (if available)
? Favourites button
i Depending on the vehicle equipment,
there are up to two favourites buttons available for the ML.
Back button
You can exit a menu or call up the basic display of the current operating mode using this
button.
X To exit the menu: press back button :
briefly.
COMAND changes to the next higher menu
level in the current operating mode.
At a glance
COMAND controller
17
COMAND operating system
18
i You can also exit a menu by sliding the
At a glance
COMAND controller XVY or ZVÆ.
To call up the basic display: press and
hold back button :.
COMAND changes to the basic display of
the current operating mode.
Delete button
You can delete individual characters or an
entire entry during character entry using this
button.
X To delete individual characters: briefly
press delete button ;.
X To delete an entire entry: press and hold
delete button ;.
Favourites buttons
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there
are up to two favourites buttons available for
the ML.
You can assign predefined functions in
favourites buttons = and ? and call them
up by pressing the button (Y page 47).
COMAND operating system
19
General notes
! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Items stored there may damage
the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Furthermore, pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display which
could be irreversible.
Wearing polarised sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The screen's brightness dims automatically if the display overheats. The display may temporarily switch off completely.
Display overview
The COMAND display shows the function currently selected and its associated menus. The
COMAND display is divided into several areas.
The radio display is shown in the example.
: Status bar
; To call up the audio menu
= Main function bar
? Display/selection window
A Radio menu bar
Status bar : shows the time and the current settings for telephone operation. If the traffic
announcement function is switched on, the . symbol appears and when the sound is
switched off, the , symbol is displayed.
At a glance
COMAND display
At a glance
20
COMAND operating system
The main functions navigation, audio, telephone and video feature additional menus. This is
indicated by triangle ;. The following table lists the available menu items.
Main function bar = allows you to call up the desired main function.
In the example, the Audio main function is set to radio mode and display/selection window ? is active.
Radio menu bar A allows you to operate the radio functions.
Menu overview
Navi
Audio
Telephone
Route settings
Radio (includ- Teleing DAB radio) phone
Map settings
Disc
Personal POIs
Memory card
O Activating/
deactivating the
read aloud function for TMC
reports
MUSIC REGISTER
O Activating/
deactivating road
name announcement
USB storage
device
O Audio fadeout
on/off
Media Interface
O Activating/
deactivating the
alternative routes
function
Bluetooth®
audio
Avoiding an area
Rear
Showing the map
version
AUX
Video
System
Globe symbol
TV
Calling up
the system
menu
Calling up
COMAND
Online and
Internet
Address Video
book
DVD
AUX
COMAND operating system
21
Settings
Time
Consumption
Display off
Display settings
Setting the time
Calling up the fuel
consumption display
Switching off the
display
Setting the text
reader speed
Setting the format
LINGUATRONIC settings
Setting the time zone
Setting the language
Favourites button
Reversing camera
O Activating/deactivating Bluetooth®
Importing/exporting
data
Resetting COMAND
The favourites button function is available for the ML.
Reversing camera function: if the function is activated and COMAND is switched on, the
image of the reversing camera is automatically shown in the COMAND display when reverse
gear is engaged.
Cleaning instructions
! Do not touch the COMAND display. The
display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you
have to clean the screen, however, use a
mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free
cloth.
The display must be switched off and cooled
down before you start cleaning. Clean the
display screen, when necessary, with a commercially available microfibre cloth and
cleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible
damage. Then, dry the surface with a dry
microfibre cloth.
Avoid using alcoholic thinners, petrol or abrasive cleaning agents. These could damage the
display surface.
At a glance
System menu overview
22
Operating COMAND
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
Function
9:
Selects a submenu or
scrolls through lists
Confirms selections and
fades out messages
Page
124
124
Back button or switches
LINGUATRONIC off (see the
separate operating instructions)
Operating COMAND
Example: SLK
Function
Multifunction display (see
the vehicle Owner's Manual)
Switches on LINGUATRONIC (see the separate
operating instructions)
Rejects or ends a call
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial memory
WX
Adjusts the volume
Mutes
=;
Selects a menu
Selecting a main function
Page
Initial situation
You would like to switch from navigation
mode (address entry menu) to the system
settings, for example.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
123
123
124
30
30
124
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Select Address entry and press W to
confirm.
The address entry menu appears.
23
At a glance
Operating COMAND
Address entry menu
: Main function bar
: To call up the audio menu
Slide the COMAND controller ZV and
switch to main function bar :.
X Select System in the main function bar by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The system menu appears.
Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The Audio menu appears.
Audio menu
The # dot indicates the current audio mode.
Calling up the menu of a main function
If one of the main functions navigation, audio,
telephone or video is switched on, triangle : appears next to the entry. You can now
select an associated menu.
The example describes how to call up the
audio menu from audio CD mode. Insert a
CD/DVD (Y page 193).
Select another audio mode, e.g. Radio, by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Selecting a menu item
The example describes how to select a station
from the station presets in radio mode.
Press the $ function button.
Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The station preset memory appears.
Operating COMAND
24
Calling up the current audio function
At a glance
Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The basic display of the current audio function, e.g. audio CD mode, appears.
Select the station by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The station is set.
Example of operation
Initial situation
You would like to switch from the system
function to radio mode and set a station, for
example.
The operating example describes how to:
Rcall
up the current audio function
on radio mode
Rset a station.
X To call up the system menu: press the
W button.
Rswitch
: To call up the audio menu
Switching on radio mode
Option 1
Press the $ function button.
The radio or DAB radio display appears.
i Repeatedly pressing this function button
switches between the FM, MW, SW and LW
wavebands in that order and then calls up
DAB radio mode. Pressing the button again
takes you back to FM radio mode.
Option 2
System menu
Select Audio again by sliding ZV the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The Audio menu appears. Radio is highlighted.
Operating COMAND
25
Option 1: town list with character bar
Call up the town list with character bar
(Y page 54).
The alphabetically sorted town list shows
the first available entries.
Press W the COMAND controller and confirm Radio.
The radio basic display appears with the
waveband last selected.
Entering characters using the character
bar
Select B by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
To set a station: turn cVd or slide XVY
the COMAND controller while the display/
selection window is active.
Entering characters in navigation
mode (entering a town)
General information
The following paragraphs describe how to
enter characters using town input for BER‐
LIN as an example.
If you want to use the address entry menu
(Y page 53) to enter a town, a street or a
house number, for example, COMAND provides either a list with a character bar
(option 1) or a selection list (option 2).
You can enter the characters using either the
character bar or the number keypad. In the
: Character entered by the user B
; Characters automatically added by
COMAND AABE
= List entry that most closely resembles the
current entry by the user
? To switch to the selection list
A To delete an entry
B To change the character set (Latin/Cyril-
lic)
C Characters not currently available
At a glance
selection list, you select an entry to copy it to
the address entry menu.
Operating COMAND
26
D Characters currently available
At a glance
E Character bar
F To cancel an entry
G Currently selected character
H List
List H shows all available town names beginning with a B. List entry most closely resembling the current entry by the user = is
always highlighted at the top of the list
(BAABE in the example).
All characters currently entered by the user
are shown in black (letter B : in the example). Letters added by COMAND are shown in
grey ; (letters AABE in the example).
Character bar E shows the letters still available for selection in black D. These can be
selected. In the example, the letter A is highlighted G. Which characters remain available
depends on the characters already entered
by the user and on the data stored in the digital map. Characters that are no longer available are shown in grey C.
Select E, R, L, I, N in succession, confirming
each by pressing W.
Entering characters using the number
keypad
Press number key l twice in quick succession to select the letter B.
The character appears at the bottom of the
display when the key is pressed. The first
available letter is highlighted.
You see which characters you can enter with
that key. Each time the key is pressed, the
next character is selected.
Example: key l:
Rpress
once = A
twice = B
Rpress three times = C
X Wait until the character display goes out.
The entries matching your input are shown
in the list.
Rpress
Enter E, R, L, I, N using the corresponding
keys.
Further functions in the list with character bar
To delete characters: select F by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
or
Press the j button next to the
COMAND controller.
To delete an entry: select F and press
and hold W the COMAND controller until
the entire entry has been deleted.
or
Press the j button next to the
COMAND controller and hold it until the
entire entry is deleted.
To switch the character set: select
B and press W to confirm.
This will switch the character set from Latin
to Cyrillic and back.
To cancel an entry: select the & symbol
in the bottom left of the character bar and
press W to confirm.
or
Press the % back button.
The address entry menu appears.
X
To accept the first list entry: press and
hold W the COMAND controller until the
address entry menu appears.
The accepted list entry is shown there.
Confirm BERLING by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
You see the available entries.
Confirm BERLIN (1XXXX) by pressing W
the COMAND controller.
The address entry menu appears. You can
now enter a street, for example.
Calling up the list as a selection list
Select the desired town from the selection
list.
If there are several entries for a town or if
several towns of the same name are stored,
then ¬ is highlighted in the character bar.
Press W the COMAND controller.
It is also possible to switch the town list to
the selection list at any time during character
input.
Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the town list appears as a selection list.
or
Select ¬ in the character bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Option 2: town list as selection list
COMAND either shows the selection list automatically or you can call up the selection list
from the list with character bar.
The example shows the selection list after the
town BERLIN has been entered. The entry is
highlighted automatically. The G icon indicates that there are several entries.
i You will find further information in the
"Destination entry" section (Y page 53).
Entering characters in the address
and the phone book
Introduction
The following section describes how to enter
characters in the phone book (Y page 128)
and the address book (Y page 141) when
creating a new entry.
Creating a new entry in the phone book
Call up the input menu with data fields
(Y page 132).
27
At a glance
Operating COMAND
Operating COMAND
At a glance
28
Phone book: input menu with data fields
: To switch the character bar to upper-
Creating a new entry in the address
book
; To switch the character bar from upper/
= Changing the language of the character
case/lower-case letters
Call up the input menu with data fields
(Y page 141).
lower-case letters to digits
bar
? To delete a character/an entry
Select c and confirm by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
The letter c is added to S in the data field.
X Repeat the process until the name has
been entered in full.
Input menu with data fields
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
Entering characters
The example describes how to enter the surname Schulz.
X Select S by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
S is entered into the data field. All characters are shown in black and can always be
selected in the character bar.
The character bar offers characters corresponding to the respective data field (letters or digits).
To enter a phone number: select the digits one by one in the corresponding data
field by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Switching data fields
If you want to enter a first name after you have
entered a surname, for example, proceed as
follows to switch between the data fields:
Option 1
Select 4 or 5 in the character bar and
press W to confirm.
The input menu shows the data field selected.
29
At a glance
Basic functions of COMAND
: Cursor in the next data field
; To store an entry
= 4 and 5 icons to select a data field
To reposition the cursor within the data
field: select 2 or 3 and press W to confirm.
Option 2
Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the character bar disappears.
X Select the data field by sliding ZVÆ and
press W to confirm.
Storing an entry
Select ¬ in the character bar by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The entry is stored in the address book.
Further functions available in the character bar
To switch the character bar to upper/
lower-case characters: select * or
E and press W to confirm.
To switch the character set: select
p and press W to confirm.
The character set switches between
upper/lower-case letters and digits.
To change the language of the character bar: select B and press W to confirm.
X Select the language by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
: Cursor (repositioned)
; 2 and 3 icon to reposition the cursor
Delete the character/entry (Y page 26).
Basic functions of COMAND
Switching COMAND on/off
Press the q control knob.
A warning message appears. COMAND
calls up the previously selected menu.
i If you switch off COMAND, playback of
the current audio or video source will also
be switched off.
Basic functions of COMAND
30
At a glance
Switching the COMAND display on/
off
Press the W function button.
Switching Traffic Programme and navigation announcements on again
Traffic Programme: press and hold down
the 8 button until the . display in the
status bar appears.
A confirmation tone sounds.
Navigation announcements: switch
COMAND off and then on again
(Y page 30).
or
Select System in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
In both cases, the system menu appears.
To switch off: select Display off and
press W to confirm.
X To switch on: press one of the function
buttons, e.g. W, Ø or the % back
button.
or
or
Mute
Switching audio and video sources on/
off
Start a new route calculation
(Y page 56).
If the navigation menu is shown, select
+ and press W to confirm
(Y page 81).
Adjusting the volume
Press the 8 button on COMAND or on
the multifunction steering wheel.
The sound from the respective audio or
video source is switched on or muted.
i When the sound is off, the system displays the , icon in the status line. When
you change the audio or video source, or
adjust the volume, sound automatically
switches on again.
Adjusting the volume for the audio or
video source
i Even if the sound is switched off, you will
You can also adjust the volume for the following:
still hear traffic and navigation system
announcements.
Switching off Traffic Programme and
navigation announcements completely
Traffic Programme: press and hold the
8 button until the . display disappears from the status bar of the display.
A confirmation tone sounds.
Navigation announcements: press the
8 button during the announcement.
Turn the q control knob.
or
Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The volume of the currently selected audio
or video source changes.
Rtraffic
announcements
announcements
Rphone calls
RLINGUATRONIC voice control (see the separate operating instructions)
Rnavigation
Adjusting the volume for traffic
announcements and navigation
announcements
i You can set the volume of traffic and navigation announcements relative to the volume of the audio or video source.
During traffic or navigation announcements:
Turn the q control knob.
or
Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Adjusting the volume for phone calls
You can adjust the volume for hands-free
mode during a telephone call.
Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You can now set the treble and bass or the
balance and fader for radio mode.
Adjusting treble and bass
Turn the q control knob.
Select Treble or Bass in the sound menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
or
Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel.
Adjusting the sound settings
Calling up the sound menu
You can make various sound settings for the
different audio and video sources. This means
that it is possible to set more bass for radio
mode than for audio CD mode, for example.
You can call up the respective sound menu
from the menu of the desired mode.
The example describes how to call up the
sound menu in radio mode.
X Press the $ function button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband.
Adjusting the bass (example: SLK)
Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The setting is stored and you exit the menu.
Adjusting balance and fader
With the Balance function, you can control
whether the sound is louder on the driver's or
front-passenger side.
With the Fade function, you can control
whether the sound is louder in the front or the
rear of the vehicle.
Fader
Vehicle
Function available
C-Class, ML
Function not available
SL, SLK
Select Balance or Bal./Fad. (Balance/
Fader) in the sound menu by turning cVd
31
At a glance
Basic functions of COMAND
Basic functions of COMAND
32
At a glance
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Rvideo
DVD (PCM, dts and Dolby Digital
audio formats)
RAUX
Because some DVDs contain both stereo and
multichannel audio formats, it may be necessary to set the audio format (Y page 202).
i The Logic7® on function creates a sur-
Adjusting the balance (example: SLK)
Select a balance setting by sliding XVY the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select a fader setting by sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The setting is stored and you exit the menu.
Surround sound
General notes
If your vehicle is equipped with the harman/
kardon® Logic 7® surround sound system,
you can set the optimum surround sound in
the vehicle interior.
The harman/kardon®Logic 7® surround
sound system is available for the following
operating modes:
(FM only)
radio
Raudio CD
Raudio DVD (MLP, dts, PCM and Dolby Digital audio formats)
RMP3 (including SD memory card and USB
storage device)
RMedia Interface
RBluetooth® audio mode
RTV
round sound experience for every
passenger when playing, for example,
stereo recordings. It enables optimum playback of music and films on CD, audio DVD
or video DVD with multichannel audio formats, such as MLP, dts or Dolby Digital.
This results in sound characteristics like
those intended by the sound engineer
when the original was recorded.
i If you select Logic7® off, all permissible
formats are played as stored on the
medium. Due to the design of the
passenger compartment, an optimum
audio experience cannot be guaranteed for
all passengers.
i Discs which support the audio formats
mentioned have the following logos:
Dolby Digital
Rradio
RDAB
dts
Climate control status display
33
MLP
Switching surround sound on/off
The example describes how to set the surround sound for radio mode.
Select Logic7® on or Logic7® off by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Depending on your selection, surround
sound is switched on or off and the menu
is exited.
X To exit the menu without saving: press
the % back button or slide XVY the
COMAND controller.
i Please note the following: for the optimum audio experience for all passengers
when LOGIC7® is switched on, the balance
and fader settings should be set to the
centre of the vehicle interior.
You will achieve the best sound results by
playing high-quality audio and video DVDs.
MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least
128 kbit/s.
Surround sound playback does not function for mono signal sources, such as the
medium wave range (MW) in radio mode.
If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel,
you should switch off Logic 7®, as it may
otherwise switch between stereo and
mono and cause temporary sound distortions.
On some stereo recordings, the sound
characteristics may differ from conventional stereo playback.
Press the $ function button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband.
Select Sound by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select surround and press W to confirm.
Climate control status display
If you change the settings of the climate control system (see the vehicle Owner's Manual),
the climate status display appears for three
seconds at the bottom of the screen in the
COMAND display. It displays the current settings of the various climate control functions.
The climate status display appears when you:
Setting surround sound (example: SLK)
Turn one of the two temperature controls
and set the temperature for the left or
At a glance
Rear Seat Entertainment System
34
At a glance
right1, 2 or turn the temperature control and
set the temperature3, 4.
or
Turn the control to set the airflow3, 4.
or
Press one of the following buttons:
K increases air flow1, 2
I decreases air
flow1, 2
¿ switches climate control on/off1, 2, 3
á switches the "ZONE" function on/
off1, 2
à controls the air conditioning automatically1, 2
ñ sets the climate control style in automatic mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE)2
_ sets the air distribution1, 2
M, P or O sets the air distribution3, 4.
¬ turns on the "Defrost" function1, 2, 3, 4
i The climate status display does not
appear when the image from the reversing
camera is displayed.
The illustration shows an example of current
settings for the "Defrost" function (above)
and the climate control style in automatic
mode (below).
X To hide the display: turn or press the
COMAND controller.
or
X Press one of the buttons on the COMAND
operating system.
i A detailed description of the climate control is available in the Owner's Manual.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Components
Overview
The Rear Seat Entertainment System comprises:
Rtwo
rear-compartment screens behind the
front-seat head restraints
Rthe remote control
Ra CD/DVD drive
RAUX jacks on both screens (AUX display)
and on the CD/DVD drive (AUX drive)
Rtwo sets of cordless headphones
The climate status display in the COMAND display
(example)
Available for THERMOTRONIC 2-zone automatic climate control.
Available for THERMOTRONIC 3-zone automatic climate control.
3 Available for the air-conditioning system.
4 Available for Heatmatic.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
35
At a glance
Rear-compartment screens
: AUX jacks, detailed view in the "CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks" section (Y page 37)
; Display
36
Rear Seat Entertainment System
At a glance
Remote control
Overview
Selecting the screen for the remote control
You can use the remote control to operate
one of the two rear screens at a time. To do
so, you must switch the remote control to the
desired screen.
X To select the left-hand screen: turn thumbwheel = until "L REAR" is highlighted in the
window.
X To select the right-hand screen: turn
thumbwheel = until "REAR R" is highlighted in the window.
Switching the screen on/off
: Switching the screen on/off
; To switch the button lighting on/off
= To select the screen for the remote con-
trol
? To select a menu or menu item
If the key is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition
lock (see the vehicle Owner's Manual), or the
key is not inserted, the screens in the rear will
switch off after 30 minutes. Before the
screens switch off, they show a message to
this effect.
You can switch the screens back on. However, this will discharge the starter battery.
X Point the remote control at the rear-compartment screen which has been selected
for remote operation.
X Press button : on the remote control.
The respective rear screen switches on or
off.
i You can only switch the screens on using
the remote control if the ignition is
switched on.
A To confirm a selection or setting
Switching the button lighting on/off
B To switch sound on/off (for corded head-
phones)
To adjust the volume (for corded headphones)
To skip, fast-forward/fast-rewind
To select a track, to enter directly
To exit a menu (back)
Press button ; on the remote control.
Depending on the previous status, the button lighting is switched on or off.
i If you do not use the remote control for
about 15 seconds, the button lighting
switches off automatically.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
37
Press button B on the remote control.
The sound is switched on/off.
Selecting a menu/menu item and confirming your selection
Select a menu/menu item using the
=;9: buttons on the
remote control and press the 9 button to
confirm.
CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks
: CD/DVD slot
; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal
(red)
= AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal
(white)
? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
A CD/DVD eject button
The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.
Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand
side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX
display), (Y page 35).
At a glance
Switching the sound on/off (corded
headphones only)
Rear Seat Entertainment System
38
At a glance
Cordless headphones
Overview
: Volume control
; Selecting a screen for the headphones
= Battery compartment cover
? To switch the cordless headphones on/off
A Indicator lamp with various displays (Y page 38)
Open both sides of the headphones and adjust the fit of the headphones by pulling the
headphone band in the direction of the arrow.
Switching the cordless headphones
on/off
Press button ?.
Depending on the previous status, the
headphones are switched on or off. To save
the battery, the headphones are switched
off automatically if they do not receive an
audio signal within three minutes.
Adjusting the volume of the headphones
Turn volume control : until the desired
volume has been set.
i If you have connected corded headphones to a rear-compartment screen, you
can adjust the volume by pressing buttons
C on the remote control (Y page 36).
Selecting a screen for the headphones
Move push slider ; to L (left-hand screen)
or R (right-hand screen).
Indicator lamp displays
The colour of the indicator lamp shows
whether the headphones are switched on or
off and indicates the charge level of the batteries inserted.
Reversing camera
Status
Green
The headphones are switched
on and connected to a screen.
Flashes
green
The headphones are establishing the connection to a
screen.
Red
The headphones are switched
on and the batteries are
almost discharged.
No display
(dark)
The headphones are switched
off or the batteries are discharged.
Connecting additional headphones
You can connect one additional set of corded
headphones to each of the two rear screens
(Y page 35). The socket is designed for headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo jack plug and
an impedance of 32 ohms.
viously selected display as soon as you shift
out of reverse gear.
i Further information on the reversing camera driving system can be found in the vehicle Owner's Manual.
Press the W function button.
The system menu appears.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Rear view camera and press W to
confirm.
Select Activation by R gear and press
W to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
Changing batteries
Batteries are required for the remote control
and for the two sets of cordless headphones.
For changing batteries: (Y page 244)
Reversing camera
G Risk of accident
The reversing camera is designed to assist
you when reversing.
Please observe the corresponding safety
notes in your vehicle's Owner's Manual.
If your vehicle is equipped with a reversing
camera, its image is automatically relayed to
the COMAND display if the function is activated and you engage reverse gear.
If the function is activated, the COMAND display will automatically switch back to the pre-
At a glance
LED display
39
40
Vehicle equipment ..............................
Display settings ..................................
Time settings .......................................
Fuel consumption display ..................
Text reader settings ............................
LINGUATRONIC settings .....................
42
42
42
44
44
44
Bluetooth® settings ............................
System language settings ..................
Assigning the favourites button ........
Importing/exporting data ..................
Reset function .....................................
46
47
47
48
48
System settings
41
Time settings
42
Vehicle equipment
System settings
i These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your vehicle at the time it was purchased. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features described.
Display settings
Setting the brightness
The brightness detected by the display light
sensor affects the setting options for this
function.
X Press the W button.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Display and press W to confirm.
Select Brightness and press W to confirm.
design by manually selecting day or night
design or opt for an automatic setting.
X Press the W button.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Display and press W to confirm.
Select Day design, Night design or
Automatic by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
A dot indicates the current setting.
Design
Explanation
Day design
The display is set permanently to day design.
Night design
The display is set permanently to night design.
Automatic
When the Automatic
setting is selected,
COMAND evaluates the
readings from the automatic vehicle light sensor and switches
between the display
designs automatically.
Time settings
General information
Adjust the brightness by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Display design
Your COMAND display features optimised
designs for operation during daytime and
night-time hours. You can customise the
If COMAND is equipped with a navigation system and has GPS reception, COMAND automatically sets the time and date. You can also
adjust the time yourself in 30-minute increments, but the date cannot be changed.
i If you set the time in 30-minute increments, any time zone settings and settings
for changing between summer and standard time are lost (Y page 43).
i The following navigation system functions
require the time, time zone and summer/
standard time to be set correctly in order
to work properly:
Rroute
guidance on routes with timedependent traffic guidance
Rcalculation of expected time of arrival
Abbreviation
Meaning
DD/MM/YYYY
Day/Month/Year
(date format)
HH/MM
Hours/Minutes
(time format)
You can set the 24-hour or the AM/PM format.
Setting the time
Press the W button.
Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Set time and press W to confirm.
Set the format by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Setting the time zone and switching
between summer and standard time
Press the W button.
Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Set the time by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The time is accepted.
Setting the time/date format
Press the W button.
Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Format and press W to confirm.
The # symbols show the current settings.
Select Time zone and press W to confirm.
The country list appears. The # dot indicates the current setting.
X Select the country you are currently in by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
A time zone list may also be displayed,
depending on the country selected.
X Select the time zone and press W to confirm.
Further steps depend on whether the navigation system currently has GPS reception and
on which country you have selected.
You have the following two options:
To change manually: select Summer
time or Standard time and press W to
confirm.
To switch automatic changeover on/
off: select Autom. Summer / Winter
time on or Autom. Summer / Winter
43
System settings
Time settings
LINGUATRONIC settings
44
time off by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
System settings
i If you have switched off the automatic
changeover function, you must change
from summer to standard time and vice
versa manually using the "Set time" function (Y page 43).
Fuel consumption display
The fuel consumption display may differ from
the display in the From Start trip computer
in the Trip menu, see the vehicle Owner's
Manual.
Exiting the display
Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeatedly until the clock display appears.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The system menu appears.
Overview
You can display the fuel consumption in the
COMAND display.
If your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle, you can call
up other displays (see the separate operating
instructions).
Calling up displays
Press the W button.
X In the System menu, slide ZV the
COMAND controller up until the full screen
is displayed.
X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeatedly until the fuel consumption indicator
appears.
The COMAND display shows the fuel consumption for the last 15 minutes of the
journey.
Text reader settings
Setting the text reader speed
Press the W button.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Text reader speed and press W
to confirm.
A list appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
LINGUATRONIC settings
Opening/closing the help window
The help window provides information in addition to the audible instructions during individualisation as well as later, when you are
using voice control.
X Press the W button.
Every bar of the graph displays the average
value for one minute.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Linguatronic and press W to confirm.
X
Select Help window and press W to confirm.
You have switched the help window on
O or off ª.
Individualisation
Introduction
Using individualisation, you can fine tune LINGUATRONIC to your own voice and thus
improve voice recognition. This means that
other users' voices will not be recognised as
easily, and therefore this function can be
deactivated (Y page 46).
Individualisation comprises two parts and
takes approximately 5 minutes. It consists of
training the system to recognise a certain
number of digit sequences and voice commands.
Starting new individualisation
Individualisation can only be started when the
vehicle is stationary. Before starting, switch
off all devices or functions which could interfere, such as the radio or the navigation system. After starting the session, the system
guides you through the training with spoken
instructions.
X Press the W button.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Linguatronic and press W to confirm.
Select Start new individualisation
and press W to confirm.
You see and hear a prompt asking whether
you would like further information.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select No, the first part of individualisation begins. You will be asked whether
you would like to train digits or voice commands.
If you select Yes, you will see and hear
information on the individualisation process. The first part of individualisation then
begins automatically.
To close the display: press W the
COMAND controller.
You will be asked whether you would like
to train digits or voice commands.
At the end of the first part, a prompt will
appear asking whether you wish to begin the
second part.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select No, individualisation will be
cancelled. The data from the first part is
stored automatically.
If you select Yes, the second part will begin.
Individualisation is completed at the end of
the second part. You will see a message to
this effect. The data from the second part is
stored automatically.
45
System settings
LINGUATRONIC settings
Bluetooth® settings
46
System settings
Activating/deactivating individualisation
Press the W button.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Linguatronic and press W to confirm.
Select Individualisation on and press
W to confirm.
Individualisation is activated O or deactivated ª.
Cancelling the first or second part of
individualisation
Confirm Cancel by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to cancel.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the voice training will be
cancelled. The data from the part during
which you exited is not stored.
If you select No, the current part begins
again.
Deleting existing individualisation data
Press the W button.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Linguatronic and press W to confirm.
Select Delete individualisation and
press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to delete.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
If you select Yes, the individualisation is
deleted. You will see a message to this
effect.
Bluetooth® settings
General information about Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® technology is the standard for
short-range wireless data transmission of up
to approximately 10 metres. Bluetooth®
allows, for example, the exchange of vCards.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth®
Press the W button.
The system menu appears.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Activate Bluetooth and press
W to confirm.
This switches Bluetooth® on O or off ª.
Assigning the favourites button
This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language
affects the characters available for entry.
If you change the system language, the language for LINGUATRONIC will be also be
changed. If the selected language is not supported by LINGUATRONIC, English will be
selected.
X Press the W button.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Language and press W to confirm.
The list of languages appears. The # dot
indicates the current setting.
Select the language by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
COMAND loads the selected language and
sets it.
Assigning the favourites button
This function is available for the ML. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can assign
one or two favourites buttons. They are located on the left (one favourites button fitted)
or on the left and right (two favourites buttons
fitted) beside the COMAND controller
(Y page 17).
You can select the following predefined functions in a menu:
RDisplay
off/on: you can switch the display off or on.
RFull screen: 'Clock': you can show the
clock in full screen.
RFull screen: 'Map': you can show the
map in full screen.
RSpoken driving tip: you can call up the
current driving recommendation.
RDisplay
traffic messages: you can call
up traffic reports.
RNavigate to 'Home address': you can
start route guidance to your home address
if you have already entered and saved the
address (Y page 57).
RDetour menu: you can call up the Detour
menu and then avoid a section of the route
and recalculate the route (Y page 82).
RCompass screen: you can call up the compass.
X To assign a favourites button: press the
W button.
X Select Settings by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Assign as favourite and press
W to confirm.
The list of predefined functions appears.
If your vehicle is equipped with a favourites
button, the # dot indicates the currently
selected function.
If your vehicle is equipped with two favourites buttons, two asterisks indicate the currently selected function for the respective
favourites button.
X Select the function by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
If your vehicle is equipped with a favourites
button, it is assigned with the function
selected.
If your vehicle is equipped with two favourites buttons, you will see a submenu.
X Select the favourites button by turning
cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The favourites button selected is assigned
the predefined function.
X To call up a favourite (example): press
the g favourites button.
This calls up the predefined function.
System settings
System language settings
47
Reset function
48
System settings
Importing/exporting data
With this function, you can transfer COMAND
data from one system (vehicle) to another
system (vehicle). You can either use an SD
memory card or a USB storage device (e.g. a
USB stick) as temporary storage.
X Press the W button.
The system menu appears.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Import/export data and press
W to confirm.
X Select Import data or Export data and
press W to confirm.
To select all data: select All data and
press W to confirm.
This function exports all the data to the
selected disc.
X Select the data type and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous entry, select the
data type for the export O or not ª.
Reset function
You can reset COMAND to the factory settings. Amongst other things, this will delete
all personal data (e.g. station presets,
address book entries, entries in the destination memory and in the list of previous destinations in the navigation system). Resetting
is recommended before selling or transferring
ownership of your vehicle, for example.
Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music
files in the MUSIC REGISTER, will be deleted.
You can also delete music files from the
MUSIC REGISTER using the "Delete all music
files" (Y page 210) function.
X Press the W function button.
Select Settings by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Reset and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to reset.
To select a storage location: insert the
memory card (Y page 196) or USB storage
device into the USB port (Y page 196).
X Select Memory card or USB storage and
press W to confirm.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
If you select Yes, a prompt will appear again
asking whether you really wish to reset.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, a message will be shown.
COMAND is reset and restarted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Export data menu (example)
Vehicle equipment .............................. 50
Introduction ......................................... 50
Basic settings ...................................... 52
Destination entry ................................ 53
Entering a special destination ........... 66
Personal special destinations ............ 71
Route guidance ................................... 75
Dynamic route guidance .................... 88
Destination memory ........................... 92
Previous destinations ......................... 95
Map operation and settings ............... 96
Additional settings ........................... 103
Problems with the navigation system ..................................................... 109
Navigation system
49
50
Introduction
Vehicle equipment
Navigation system
i These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your vehicle at the time it was purchased. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features described.
Introduction
Safety notes
G Risk of accident
For safety reasons, only enter a new destination when the vehicle is stationary. You may
otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself
and others.
COMAND calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following,
for example:
Rtraffic lights
Rstop and give way signs
Rparking or stopping restrictions
Rlane narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
COMAND may give incorrect driving recommendations if the data on the digital map does
not correspond to the actual conditions. For
example, a route may have been diverted or
the direction of a one-way street may have
changed.
For this reason, you must always observe the
respective road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic
rules and regulations always have priority
over system driving recommendations.
General notes
Operational readiness of the navigation
system
In vehicles for certain countries, the navigation system is not operational immediately
after delivery because the digital map is not
pre-installed.
If this is the case, the following message
appears in the display after you switch to navigation mode:
Please insert the map DVD to acti‐
vate navigation.
X To install the map software: proceed as
described in the "Updating the digital map"
section (Y page 107).
The navigation system must determine the
position of the vehicle before first use or
whenever operational status is restored.
Therefore, you may have to drive for a while
before precise route guidance is possible.
GPS reception
Correct functioning of the navigation system
depends, amongst other things, on GPS
reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g.
in tunnels or multi-storey car parks.
Entry restriction
On vehicles for certain countries, there is a
restriction on entering data.
The restriction is active above a vehicle speed
of about 5 km/h. The restriction is deactivated as soon as the vehicle speed drops below
about 3 km/h.
When the restriction is active, certain entries
cannot be made. This will be indicated by the
fact that certain menu items are greyed out
and cannot be selected.
Introduction
51
The following entries are not possible, for
example:
Rentering
the destination town and street
a destination via the map
Rentering special destinations in the vicinity
of a town or via a name search
Rediting entries
Rdirect entry using the number keypad
Other entries are possible, such as entering
special destinations in the vicinity of the destination or current position.
Addresses can be entered via LINGUATRONIC (see separate Operating Instructions) while the vehicle is in motion.
Switching on navigation mode
Option 1
Press the Ø function button.
The map is displayed with the menu either
shown or hidden.
Option 2
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The map is displayed with the menu shown.
Map without the menu; route guidance inactive
: Current vehicle position
; Map orientation selected
= Map scale selected
"Route guidance active" means that you have
entered a destination and that COMAND has
calculated the route. The display shows the
route, changes of direction and lane recommendations. Navigation announcements
guide you to your destination.
"Route guidance inactive" means that no destination has been entered and that no route
has been calculated.
Showing/hiding the menu
To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full screen
menu item is shown, press W to confirm.
or
Press the % back button.
The map can be seen in the full-screen display.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller when the map is shown in fullscreen display.
Map showing the menu; route guidance inactive
: Status bar
; Main function bar
= Current vehicle position
? Navigation menu bar
Navigation system
Rentering
Basic settings
52
Basic settings
Route settings
Setting route type and route options
You can select the following route types:
Navigation system
RFast
route: COMAND calculates a route
with the shortest (minimised) journey time.
RDynamic route: same route type as Fast
route. COMAND also takes into account
any RDS-TMC traffic reports received during route guidance5. Thus, the navigation
system is able to guide you around a traffic
jam, for example. If a faster route is determined due to a received RDS-TMC traffic
announcement, the navigation system
changes the route. If possible, it will bypass
blocked roads.
REco route: the Eco route (economic
route) is a variant of the Fast route route
type. COMAND will attempt to minimise the
journey distance at the expense of a slightly
increased journey time.
RShort route: COMAND calculates a route
with the shortest possible (minimised)
route distance.
i On very long routes, the "Economic route"
more or less corresponds to the "Fast
route" route type.
To call up the route settings menu: press
the Ø function button.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Route settings and press W to
confirm.
Route settings menu (start of menu)
: To select the route type
; To set route options
Route settings (end of menu)
Select a route type and press W to confirm.
A filled circle indicates the current setting.
Select the route option(s) and press W to
confirm.
The route options are switched on O or off
ª, depending on the previous status.
i If you change the route type and/or the
route options while route guidance is active
(the route has been calculated), COMAND
will calculate a new route.
If you change the route type and/or the
route options while route guidance is inactive (no destination has been entered yet),
COMAND uses the new setting for the next
route guidance.
i The route calculated may, for example,
include ferry connections, even if the
RDS-TMC traffic reports are not available in all countries.
Destination entry
To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
controller.
Destination entry
Introduction to destination entry
G Risk of accident
For safety reasons, only enter a new destination when the vehicle is stationary. You could
otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions, cause an accident and injure yourself
and others.
The following destination entry options are
available:
Rentering
Entering a destination by address
Introduction
When entering an address as the destination,
you have the following options:
Rentering
the country, town/postcode,
street and house number
Rentering the country, town/postcode and
street
Rentering the country, town/postcode and
centre
Rentering the country, town/postcode,
street and junction
Rentering the country and town
Country and town are sufficient to start navigation. You can enter either a town or a postcode. By entering further address data such
as the street and house number, you can
specify the destination more precisely.
i Note that you can only enter a street,
house number, junction or centre once you
have entered a country and a town or postcode.
a destination by address
Rentering a destination from the destination
memory
a destination from the list of last
destinations
Rentering a destination using the map
Rentering a destination using geo-coordinates
Rentering an intermediate stop
Rentering waypoints
Rentering a special destination
Rentering a personal special destination
i You can only enter those towns, streets,
postcodes etc. that are stored in the digital
map. This means that for some countries,
you cannot enter postcodes, for example.
Rentering
Example of entering an address
The following is a step-by-step example of
how to enter an address. The destination
address is as follows:
Germany
Berlin
Unstrutstraße 1
You can of course enter any country, town,
street and house number desired and enter,
for example, your home address (My
address).
Calling up the address entry menu
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
Navigation system
Avoid ferries route option is switched
on.
In some cases, e.g. when calculating particularly long routes, COMAND may not be
able to take all the selected route options
into account.
53
Destination entry
54
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
Select Address entry and press W to
confirm.
The address entry menu appears. If you
have previously entered a destination, this
will be shown in the display.
Navigation system
Address entry menu
Instructions for entering characters using
town input as an example can be found in the
"Entering characters in navigation mode
(entering a town)" section (Y page 25).
X To switch to the country list as a selection list: select ¬ in the character bar
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
or
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller once or
twice.
Depending on the sequence in which you
enter the address and on the data status of
the digital map, some menu items may not be
available at all or may not yet be available.
Example: after country selection, the menu
items Street, No., Centr. (centre), Junct.
(junction), POI, Save and Start are not yet
available. The Postcode menu item will not
be available unless the digital map contains
postcodes.
Selecting the country
Select Country in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You see the list of countries with the character bar.
Select GERMANY by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
The address entry menu appears again.
GERMANY has now been entered.
Entering the town
Select Town in the address entry menu by
turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
Destination entry
55
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see the town list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Enter BERLIN. Instructions for entering
characters can be found in the "Entering
characters in navigation mode (entering a
town)" section (Y page 25).
Select BERLIN(1XXXX) by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The address entry menu appears again.
BERLIN(1XXXX) has now been entered.
Entering a street name
Option 2: town list as selection list
Select Street in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see the street list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Option 1: street list with character bar
Enter UNSTRUTSTRASSE. Instructions for
entering characters using town input as an
example can be found in the "Entering characters in navigation mode (entering a
town)" section (Y page 25).
: Highlighted selection and G icon for
additional entries
Select BERLIN by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Entries with the G icon cannot be uniquely
assigned. Another selection list is shown.
Option 2: street list as selection list
Navigation system
Option 1: town list with character bar
Destination entry
Navigation system
56
Street list
Select UNSTRUTSTRASSE by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection.
The address entry menu appears again.
UNSTRUTSTRASSE has now been entered.
Option 2: house number list as selection
list
Entering the house number
Select No. in the address entry menu by
turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see the house number list either
with the character bar (option 1) or as a
selection list (option 2).
Option 1: house number list with character bar
Enter 1. Instructions for entering characters using town input as an example can be
found in the "Entering characters in navigation mode (entering a town)" section
(Y page 25).
House number list
Select 1 by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection.
The address entry menu appears again. 1
has now been entered.
Starting route calculation
You can now have COMAND calculate the
route to the address entered or save the
address first, e.g. as your home address (My
address) (Y page 57).
Destination entry
57
of time. The time depends on the distance
from the destination, for example.
COMAND calculates the route using the
digital map data.
The calculated route may differ from the
ideal route, e.g. due to roadworks or incomplete map data. Please also refer to the
notes about the digital map (Y page 107).
Address entry menu with destination address
: Destination address
; To start route calculation
In the address entry menu, confirm Start
by pressing W.
If no other route has been calculated, route
calculation starts immediately (Option 1). If
another route has already been calculated
(route guidance is active), a prompt
appears (option 2).
Option 1 — no route guidance active: route
calculation starts. While route calculation is
in progress, an arrow will indicate the direction to your destination. Below this, you will
see a message, e.g. Calculating fast
route....
Once the route has been calculated, route
guidance begins. If the vehicle is travelling on
a non-digitised road, the system displays the
linear distance to the destination, the direction of the destination and the Off road
message. In this case, the display will be
greyed out.
Option 2 – route guidance is already
active: if route guidance is already active, a
prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to terminate the currently active route guidance.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND will stop route
guidance and start route calculation for the
new destination.
If you select No, COMAND will continue
with the active route guidance.
Entering and storing your home address
You can either enter your home address for
the first time (option 1) or edit a previously
stored home address (option 2).
X Option 1: enter the address, e.g. a town,
street and house number (Y page 54).
Once you have entered the address, select
Save in the address entry menu by turning
cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Save as "My Address" and press
W to confirm.
COMAND stores your home address as My
address in the destination memory.
Option 2: proceed as described under
"Option 1".
A prompt appears asking whether the current home address should be overwritten.
Select Yes and press W to confirm.
After selecting Yes, the Saving proce‐
dure successful message appears.
Entering a postcode
Entering a postcode will delete a previously
entered town.
X Select Postcode in the address entry menu
by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see the postcode list either with
the character bar (option 1) or as a selection list (option 2).
Navigation system
i Route calculation takes a certain amount
Destination entry
58
Option 1: postcode list with character bar
Enter a postcode. Instructions for entering
characters using town input as an example
can be found in the "Entering characters in
navigation mode (entering a town)" section
(Y page 25).
Navigation system
location. Only streets in the area covered
by the entered postcode are available.
Start route calculation (Y page 56).
Entering a centre
Entering a centre will, for example, delete a
previously entered street.
X Select Centr. (centre) in the address entry
menu by turning cVd and sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will see the centre list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Option 1: centre list with character bar
Option 2: postcode list as selection list
Enter a centre. Instructions for entering
characters using town input as an example
can be found in the "Entering characters in
navigation mode (entering a town)" section
(Y page 25).
i In big cities, you can also enter the centres of districts.
Postcode list
Select the desired postcode by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection.
If COMAND can assign the postcode to one
town unambiguously (e.g. 74172 for NECKARSULM), the address entry menu appears
again. You can now complete the address,
e.g. by entering a street.
If COMAND cannot assign the postcode
unambiguously to a specific address, the
address entry menu also appears again.
The postcode is automatically entered. You
can now enter the street for a more precise
Option 2: centre list as a selection list
X
Select a centre by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection.
The address entry menu appears again. The
centre selected has been entered.
Start route calculation (Y page 56).
Entering a junction name
Entering a junction will delete a previously
entered house number.
X Select Junct. (junction) in the address
entry menu by turning cVd and sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You will see the junction list either with the
character bar (option 1) or as a selection
list (option 2).
Option 1: junction list with character bar
Enter a junction. Instructions for entering
characters using town input as an example
can be found in the "Entering characters in
navigation mode (entering a town)" section
(Y page 25).
: G icon indicating more selection options
Select a junction by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Entries with the G icon cannot be uniquely
assigned. Another selection list is shown.
X Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The address entry menu appears again. The
junction selected has been entered.
Start route calculation (Y page 56).
Selecting a destination from the destination memory (e.g. My address)
Introduction
Option 2: junction list as selection list
The destination memory always contains an
entry named "My address". You may wish to
assign your home address to this entry, for
example (Y page 57), and select it for route
guidance. This entry is always located at the
top of the list in the destination memory.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
59
Navigation system
Destination entry
Destination entry
60
Navigation system
Select From memory and press W to confirm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
as a selection list (option 2).
Irrespective of the option, press W to confirm your selection.
The address entry menu appears again.
"My address" has been entered.
Option 1: destination memory list with
character bar
Enter a destination, e.g. "My address".
Instructions for entering characters using
town input as an example can be found in
the "Entering characters in navigation
mode (entering a town)" section
(Y page 25).
: To start route calculation
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
Entering a destination from the list of
last destinations
Option 2: destination memory list as a
selection list
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
Select From last destinations and
press W to confirm.
Destination memory list
Select My address by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
"Last destinations" list
Destination entry
Select the desired destination by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The address entry menu appears again. The
destination address selected has been
entered.
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
Once the route has been calculated, route
guidance begins (Y page 75).
i Further information on the "Last destinations" memory can be found on
(Y page 95).
Entering a destination using the map
Calling up the map
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
Select Using map and press W to confirm.
You see the map with the crosshair.
Display = depends on the settings selected
in "Map information in the display"
(Y page 99). The current road name can be
shown, provided the digital map contains the
necessary data, or it may show the geo-coordinate position of the crosshair if the geocoordinates display is switched on.
Moving the map and selecting the destination
To move the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or
aVb the COMAND controller.
To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar
appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
Turning clockwise zooms out from the map;
turning anti-clockwise zooms in.
To select a destination: press W the
COMAND controller.
If the crosshair lies outside the digital map,
COMAND uses the nearest digitised road
for route calculation. You will see the The
crosshair is off the map message. If
the crosshair is located over a body of
water, you will see the message: The des‐
tination is located in a body of
water. Please select another des‐
tination.
Select OK and press W to confirm.
If the destination is within the limits of the
digital map, COMAND attempts to assign
the destination to the map.
If the destination can be assigned, you will
see the address entry menu with the
address of the destination. If not, you will
see the Destination from map entry.
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
: Current vehicle position
; Crosshair
= Details of the crosshair position
? Map scale selected
Navigation system
61
Destination entry
62
Navigation system
Entering a destination using geo-coordinates
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
Select Using geo-coordinates and
press W to confirm.
An entry menu appears.
You can now enter the latitude and longitude
coordinates.
X To change a value: turn cVd the
COMAND controller.
X To move the mark within the line: slide
XVY the COMAND controller.
X To move the mark between the lines:
slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
X To confirm the value: press W the
COMAND controller.
i If the selected position is outside the digital map, COMAND uses the nearest digitised road for route calculation. You will see
the The position is off the map message. If the selected position is located
over a body of water, you will see the message: The destination is located in
a body of water. Please select
another destination.
Entering an intermediate stop
Introduction
You can use this function to enter an intermediate stop while the vehicle is in motion.
COMAND provides a selection of predefined
destinations in eight categories for this purpose, e.g. FILLING STATION or CAFÉ.
When you have entered your intermediate
stop, COMAND automatically recalculates
the route to the main destination.
Entering predefined destinations
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
Select Stopover and press W to confirm.
Option 1: the route does not have an intermediate stop.
Intermediate stop categories
Select a category, see option 2.
Option 2: the route already has an intermediate stop.
Select Change stopover and press W to
confirm.
Destination entry
To select a category: select a category by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
COMAND first searches in the selected category for destinations along the route. If
there are no destinations available there,
COMAND searches for destinations within
a radius of up to 100 km of the vehicle
position.
If COMAND finds destinations, a list
appears on the right-hand side of the display.
If COMAND does not find any destinations,
you will see a message to this effect.
Deleting an intermediate stop
If an intermediate stop has already been
entered, you can delete it.
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
Select Stopover and press W to confirm.
Select Delete stopover and press W to
confirm.
COMAND deletes the intermediate stop
and recalculates the route to the main destination.
Search result for the selected category FILLING
STATION (example)
: Highlighted intermediate stop, current
distance from the vehicle position and
name of the intermediate stop
The intermediate stops along the route are
displayed at the top of the list, sorted by
increasing distance from the vehicle's current
position. Below this you will see the intermediate stops that COMAND finds in the
vicinity of the vehicle's current position.
i For intermediate stops that are not loca-
Entering waypoints
Introduction
You can map the route yourself by entering
up to two waypoints. The sequence of the
waypoints can be changed at any time.
i An intermediate stop is always between
the current position of the vehicle and the
first waypoint.
ted along the calculated route, the linear
distance is shown.
Select the intermediate stop by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The address entry menu appears, showing
the destination address.
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
Confirm OK by pressing W.
Select a different category.
Creating waypoints
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Navigation system
63
Destination entry
64
Select Way points and press W to confirm.
The destination is entered in the menu.
Navigation system
Select Dest. in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
Selection
Step
From last desti‐
nations
Select a destination from the list
of last destinations (Y page 60).
From POIs
Enter a special
destination
(Y page 66).
From personal
POIs
Enter a destination from the personal special destinations
(Y page 74).
Using map
Enter a destination using the map
(Y page 61).
Using geo-coor‐
dinates
Enter a destination using the geocoordinates
(Y page 62).
Waypoint menu without waypoints
Confirm the symbol for waypoint 1 by
pressing W the COMAND controller.
When the entry is complete, the waypoint
appears.
Confirm Set by pressing W the COMAND
controller.
X Enter the waypoint via one of the following
options.
Selection
Step
Address entry
From memory
Enter a destination by address
(Y page 53).
Select a destination from the destination memory
(Y page 59).
To accept the waypoint: confirm OK by
pressing W.
To display the details: select Details by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
To make a call: select Call with the
COMAND controller and press W to con-
Destination entry
i This menu item is available if the waypoint
has a telephone number and a mobile
phone is connected to COMAND
(Y page 114).
To call up the map: select Map with the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X You can move the map and select the destination.
To store the waypoint in the destination
memory: select Presets with the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
When you have accepted the waypoint, it is
entered in the waypoint menu. The example
shows the menu with two entered waypoints.
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X Select Edit and press W to confirm.
X Use one of the destination entry options
offered.
To change the sequence of the waypoints: select Swap in the waypoint menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The entries are swapped.
To delete waypoints: select the symbol
for waypoint 1 or 2 in the waypoint menu
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
i You can delete a waypoint directly after
entry using this menu item.
Accepting waypoints for the route
Select Start in the waypoint menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The route is calculated with the entered
waypoints.
i Continue is displayed instead of Start
Waypoint menu with two waypoints
when Calculate alternative routes is
activated in the navigation menu
(Y page 82), option 2.
Editing waypoints
You can:
Rchange
waypoints
Rchange the sequence in the waypoint menu
Rdelete
waypoints
To change the sequence, both waypoints
must be entered.
X To change waypoints: select the symbol
for waypoint 1 or 2 in the waypoint menu
In the example, there is an intermediate stop
P and a waypoint.
Navigation system
firm. COMAND switches to telephone
mode (Y page 125).
65
Entering a special destination
66
Entering a special destination
Navigation system
Calling up the special destinations
menu
Special destinations are predefined destinations within categories, e.g. a filling station in
the AUTOMOTIVE category.
You can look for special destinations:
Rin
the vicinity of the destination
the current vehicle position
Rin the vicinity of another town
Rusing its name
You can also select special destinations in the
map that are available on the map view
shown.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
Rnear
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select From POIs and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Special destinations menu ("Search by name"
selected)
Entering a special destination
67
Selection
Characteristic
Instructions
Near destina‐
tion
Entry is only possible
when route guidance is
active.
Current posi‐
tion
The system looks for a
special destination in the
vicinity of the current
vehicle position.
Other town
Option 1
After entering a town,
the system looks for the X Select Other town in the special destispecial destination
nations menu and press W to confirm.
within the town.
X Select the country, if desired
(Y page 54).
X Enter the town. Proceed as described in
the "Entering a town" section
(Y page 54).
X Select a special destination category
(Y page 68).
Select Near destination from the special destinations menu (Y page 66) and
press W to confirm.
X Select a special destination category
(Y page 68).
Select Current position in the special
destinations menu and press W to confirm.
X Select a special destination category
(Y page 68).
Option 2
Enter a town in the address entry menu
(Y page 53).
Select POI and press W to confirm.
X Select a special destination category.
Search by name
You can call up all the
special destinations in
the digital map or focus
your search on the three
previously selected positions.
Select Search by name in the special
destinations menu and press W to confirm.
X Select All POIs or one of the three previously selected positions.
The special destination list with character bar appears.
X Proceed as described in the "Special
destination list with character bar" section (Y page 70).
Navigation system
Defining the position for the special destination search
Entering a special destination
68
Search by special destination category
After selecting the menu items, the special
destination categories appear:
RNear
destination
position
ROther town (after entering a town)
Navigation system
RCurrent
Select a category and press W to confirm.
In the example, the FILLING STATION category has been selected.
X Select the ALL entry or one of the different
filling station brands.
The search for special destinations begins
in the vicinity of the selected position.
i If you have selected Search by name and
then defined the position for the search,
the special destination list with character
bar appears (Y page 70).
Special destination search near the current position (example)
i The special destination search is cancel-
Select a special destination category by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
In the example, the AUTOMOTIVE category
has been selected. The G arrow behind an
entry shows that other categories are available.
led when 50 special destinations have been
found. COMAND searches within a radius
of 100 km.
If COMAND does not find any special destinations within this radius, it extends its
search range to approximately 200 km. If
COMAND finds one special destination
within this radius, it finishes the search.
Once the search is completed, the special
destination list is displayed.
Special destination list
Introduction
The special destination list displays the
search results for the selection made.
Entering a special destination
69
Navigation system
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The complete address of the special destination selected is shown.
Special destination list (example)
An entry contains the following information:
Ran
arrow that shows the linear direction to
the special destination
Rthe linear distance to the special destination
Rthe name of the special destination
i The arrow and linear distance to the destination are not visible if you have entered
a special destination within a specific town.
The arrow is not shown either when entering a special destination in the vicinity of
the destination.
Depending on the special destination
selected, COMAND uses different reference points in determining the linear distance to the destination:
: Special destination with address
; To start route calculation
= To store an address in the destination
memory
? To display details
A To make a call when available
B To display a special destination's position
on the map
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
To store an address in the destination
memory: select Save and press W to confirm. You can now select storage options
(Y page 94).
To show the detailed view: select
Details and press W to confirm.
To make a call: select Call and press W
to confirm. COMAND switches to telephone mode (Y page 125).
Rvicinity of current position: the linear dis-
tance is the distance from the current
vehicle position to the special destination.
Rvicinity of destination: the linear distance
is the distance from the destination
entered to the special destination.
Selecting a special destination
The example has been selected in the special
destination category BAR & RESTAURANT.
X Select the special destination in the special
destination list by turning cVd the
i This menu item is available if the special
destination has a telephone number and a
mobile phone is connected to COMAND
(Y page 114).
To call up the map: select Map and press
W to confirm.
X You can move the map and select the destination (Y page 61).
Entering a special destination
70
Navigation system
Special destination list with character
bar
If you have selected Search by name in the
special destination menu (Y page 66) and
then defined the position for the search
(Y page 67), the special destination list with
character bar appears.
Depending on your selection, you can select
all available special destinations on the digital
map or the special destinations in the vicinity
of the selected position.
Select Guide in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If special destinations are available:
Depending on the map scale selected, special destination icons appear on the map.
The scale at which the icons are displayed
on the map varies according to the icon.
You can select the icons that COMAND will
display (Y page 98).
If no special destinations are available, you
will see a message to this effect.
i You also see this message if you have
selected the No symbols menu item under
"Map display" (Y page 98).
To confirm the message: press W the
COMAND controller.
Search by name in the vicinity of the destination
(example)
Proceed as described in the "Searching for a
phone book entry" section (Y page 130).
i If COMAND can assign the characters
entered to one entry unambiguously, the
address entry appears automatically.
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
Selecting a special destination using
the map
You can select special destinations that are
available in the selected (visible) section of
the map.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Special destination on the map
The special destination is highlighted on the
map, you will see information on the upper
edge of the display.
X To select a special destination: select
Next or Previous and press W to confirm.
To show details for the selection: select
Details and press W to confirm.
To change to the map: slide ZV the
COMAND controller.
You can move the map and select the map
section.
X
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the special destination should be used as the destination.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, route guidance starts.
If you select No, you can choose a new special destination.
i Continue is displayed instead of Start
when Calculate alternative routes is
activated in the navigation menu
(Y page 82), option 2.
Personal special destinations
Settings
Overview
Displaying personal special destinations on the map
The personal special destinations are shown
on the map with an icon according to their
category.
X Select Display personal POIs on map
in the menu and press W to confirm.
You can select different categories.
Personal destinations can be:
Rdisplayed
on the map
on the map as you approach
Rhighlighted
them
Rmanaged
in categories
Rmanaged
Calling up the "Personal special destinations" menu
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
Selection
Explanation
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
ªNot clas‐
sified
Standard entry for personal special destinations
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
ªCOMAND
Online
Select Personal POIs and press W to
confirm.
Personal special destinations which you have
imported via COMAND
Online (Y page 168).
If you have created your own categories
(e.g. "Café", "Top 10") (Y page 72), they
are also displayed.
71
Navigation system
Personal special destinations
Personal special destinations
72
Select a category and press W to confirm.
The icon display is switched on O or off
ª, depending on the previous status.
i The icons are displayed on the map scales
Navigation system
50 m, 100 m and 200 m.
Visual information for personal special
destinations
When the vehicle is approaching a personal
special destination and the display of the relevant category is switched on, it is highlighted
on the map.
X Select Visual warning for personal
POIs in the menu and press W to confirm.
Press W to confirm the entry.
This will switch the visual information for
the personal special destinations of this
category on O or off ª, depending on the
previous setting.
Visual information for a personal special destination (example)
To create a new category: select New and
press W to confirm.
X Enter the name of the category. Proceed as
described under "Entering characters" in
the "Entering characters in the address and
phone books" section (Y page 28).
X Select the ¬ icon and press W to confirm.
A list with icons appears. You can assign an
icon to the category.
Managing categories for personal special destinations
Select Manage categories for per‐
sonal POIs in the menu and press W to
confirm.
Select an icon by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You have created a new category with a
name and icon. This category appears
when selecting the display on the map or
when selecting the destination.
To rename a category, to change an
icon: select Rename or Change icon and
press W to confirm.
X Proceed as described under "To create a
new category".
Personal special destinations
To delete a category: select Delete and
press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the category should be deleted.
i If you delete a category, all special destinations of this category are also deleted.
Select Yes and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the category will be
deleted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
i The crosshair position is saved while
scrolling the map (Y page 61).
Option 2
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 61).
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Managing personal special destinations
Select Manage personal POIs in the
menu and press W to confirm.
X Select Not classified, COMAND Online
or your own category and press W to confirm.
X Select a personal special destination and
press W to confirm.
The personal special destination is displayed.
The following functions are described in the
"Select as destination" section
(Y page 74):
Rrenaming
Rchanging the category
Rdeleting
Saving personal special destinations
There are three ways of saving personal special destinations. You must insert an SD memory card to do so. The No memory card message otherwise appears.
Option 1
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
Press W the COMAND controller for longer
than two seconds.
The current position of the vehicle is saved
as a personal special destination on the SD
memory card in the "Unclassified" category.
Select Save position as pers. POI or
Save crosshair pos. as personal
POI ("Move map" function active) and press
W to confirm.
The current position of the vehicle or the
crosshair is saved as a personal special
destination on the SD memory card in the
"Unclassified" category.
Option 3
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
Select Save in the address entry menu and
press W to confirm.
Select Save as personal POI and press
W to confirm.
X Select a category.
X Enter the name.
The current address is saved as a personal
special destination on the SD memory card.
Importing personal special destinations via COMAND Online
You can import personal special destinations
via COMAND Online (Y page 168). When
importing, you can choose whether to write
files to the SD memory card or to file them in
the address book. The imported personal special destinations have their own icon and are
filed in the "COMAND Online" category.
Navigation system
73
Personal special destinations
74
Selecting as the destination
Navigation system
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select a personal special destination and
press W to confirm.
To rename a personal special destination: select Rename and press W to confirm.
To change the category: select Change
category and press W to confirm.
To change to the map: select Map and
press W to confirm.
The position of the personal special destination is shown in the map.
Select From personal POIs and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Select an entry and press W to confirm.
Selection
Explanation
Not classi‐
fied
Standard entry for personal special destinations.
COMAND
Online
Personal special destinations which you have
imported via COMAND
Online (Y page 168).
Café
Icon and category that
you have created yourself
(Y page 72).
In the example, COMAND Online has been
selected. The received special destinations
are displayed.
i An icon is displayed according to the "Displaying personal special destinations on
the map" setting (Y page 71).
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
If route guidance has been activated, a
prompt will appear asking whether you
wish to accept the personal special destination as the destination.
Route guidance
To make a call: select Call and press W
to confirm. COMAND switches to telephone mode (Y page 125).
i This menu item is available if the personal
special destination has a telephone number and a mobile phone is connected to
COMAND (Y page 114).
To delete a personal special destination: select Delete and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the special destination.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the personal special destination is deleted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Route guidance
tions during your journey. Road and traffic
rules and regulations always have priority
over system driving recommendations.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated (Y page 56).
COMAND guides you to your destination by
means of navigation commands in the form
of audible navigation announcements and
route guidance displays.
The route guidance displays can only be seen
if the display is switched to navigation mode.
If you do not follow the navigation announcements or if you leave the calculated route,
COMAND automatically calculates a new
route to the destination.
If the digital map contains the corresponding
information, the following applies:
Rwhen
selecting a route, COMAND tries to
avoid roads that only have limited access,
e.g. roads closed to through traffic and nonresidents.
Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g.
closed on Sundays and public holidays) are
considered for route guidance on days
when they are open. For this purpose, the
relevant times must be correctly stored in
the database.
General notes
G Risk of accident
COMAND calculates the route to the destination without taking account of the following,
for example:
Rtraffic
lights
Rstop and give way signs
Rparking or stopping restrictions
Rlane narrowing
Rother road and traffic rules and regulations
COMAND may give incorrect driving recommendations if the data on the digital map does
not correspond to the actual conditions, e.g.
the road layout has changed.
For this reason, you must always observe the
respective road and traffic rules and regula-
Change of direction
Introduction
Changes of direction have three phases:
Rpreparation
phase
phase
Rchange-of-direction phase
Rannouncement
Preparation phase
COMAND prepares you for the upcoming
change of direction. Based on the example
display below, the change of direction
is announced by the Prepare to turn
right message. You see the full-screen map.
Navigation system
If route guidance has not been activated,
route calculation for the personal special
destination will start immediately.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the personal special destination is accepted as the destination.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
75
Navigation system
76
Route guidance
Example display: preparation phase
: Point at which the change of direction
takes place (light blue dot)
; Next road
Example display: announcement phase
: Next road
; Point at which the change of direction
= Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
takes place (light blue dot, shown in both
the left and right half of the display)
Graphic representation of the distance to
the next change of direction
Change of direction (turn right here)
Distance to the next change of direction
Route (blue line, shown in both the left
and right half of the display)
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
? Current road
Display ? depends on the setting selected
for "Information in map" (Y page 99).
Announcement phase
i The filled-in section of visual display for
COMAND announces the imminent change of
direction. Based on the following example,
the change of direction is announced with the
In 400 metres turn right onto the
A81 message.
The display is now split into two sectors. In
the left half, you see the normal map view.
The right half shows an enlarged section of
the area around the junction (Crossing Zoom)
or a 3D image of the road's course with the
route indicating the next manoeuvre.
distance = gets shorter the nearer you get
to the announced change of direction.
Change-of-direction phase
COMAND announces the imminent change of
direction. Based on the example display
below, the change of direction is announced
40 metres before the change of direction with
the Now turn right message. The display is
split into two halves, as in the announcement
phase.
Route guidance
77
Navigation system
Example of a display without changes
of direction
Example display: change-of-direction phase
: Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
; Graphic representation of the distance to
the next change of direction
= Distance to the next change of direction
: Route (highlighted in blue)
; Current vehicle position
= Current road
? Map orientation selected
A Map scale selected
Lane recommendations
Overview
Example display: roundabout
Once the change of direction is completed,
COMAND automatically switches back to fullscreen display.
On multilane roads, COMAND can display
lane recommendations for the next change of
direction. The relevant data must be available
on the digital map.
COMAND displays lane recommendations
B, based on the next two changes of direction. The number of lanes applies to the point
at which the next change of direction is
required.
Navigation system
78
Route guidance
Lane recommendations (example)
: Point of the next change of direction
; Point of the change of direction after next
= Direction display, number of junction and
of motorway
? Graphic representation of the distance to
the next change of direction
A Distance to the next change of direction
B Recommended lane (dark blue)
C Next change of direction (in this case, exit
to the right)
D Possible lanes (light blue)
E Not recommended lanes (light brown)
F Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
i The multifunction display also shows lane
recommendations, Only the recommended
lanes are displayed here (Y page 80).
Route guidance
79
Display and description of lane recommendations
The colours used in the lane recommendation display vary depending on whether day or night
design is switched on.
Day design
Night design
Recommended lane B
Dark blue
In this lane, you will be able to complete the
next two changes of direction without changing lanes.
Light blue
Possible lane D
Light blue
In this lane, you will only be able to complete
the next change of direction without changing lanes.
Dark blue
Lane not recommended E
Light brown
In this lane, you will not be able to complete
the next change of direction without changing lane.
Grey
Navigation system
Lane
Further display examples
During the change of direction, there may be
additional lanes which are displayed differently.
Day design (example)
: The displayed lane recommendations
apply to this position (light blue circle)
: New lane (dark blue)
Night design (example)
Route guidance
80
Street names may be announced in the following languages:
RDanish
RGerman
REnglish
Navigation system
RFrench
RDutch
RPortuguese
RSwedish
Lane recommendations at a motorway junction
(example)
Example display: multifunction display
Use = or ; to select the Navi menu.
Announcements are not made in these languages in all countries. They are made when
relevant street names for the selected language are available in the database.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Select Announce street names and press
W to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, the function is switched on O or off ª.
: Road to which the change of direction
leads
; Distance to the change of direction and
distance graphic
= Lane recommendation
? Change of direction icon
On multilane roads, the system can display
lane recommendation = for the next change
of direction. During the change of direction,
additional lanes may be displayed.
Cancelling or continuing route guidance
Cancelling route guidance
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Dest. in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
Select Cancel route guidance and press
W to confirm.
Announcing the street names
If the function is switched on, the name of the
street which you are turning into is
announced.
Route guidance
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Dest. in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
Select Continue route guidance and
press W to confirm.
COMAND calculates the route.
Destination or area of destination
reached
Switching navigation announcements
on/off
To switch off: press the 8 button during an announcement.
You will briefly see the message: The
guidance instructions have been
muted.
To switch on: press W the COMAND controller.
Select + in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
i COMAND automatically switches the navigation announcements back on when:
Rit
receives RDS-TMC traffic reports during dynamic route guidance
(Y page 88) and recalculates the route
accordingly.
Ryou have a new route calculated.
Ryou switch COMAND back on again or
start the engine.
When you reach your destination, COMAND
displays a chequered flag and route guidance
is automatically ended.
If the destination is not in close proximity to
a digitised street, the Area of destina‐
tion reached message appears when the
destination is reached.
Navigation announcements
Repeating navigation announcements
i Audible navigation announcements are
muted during a telephone call.
If you have missed an announcement, you can
call up the current announcement at any
time.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select + in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Reducing volume during a navigation
announcement
The volume of an active audio or video source
can be automatically reduced during a navigation announcement.
X Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Audio fadeout and press W to
confirm.
Depending on the previous status, the function is switched on O or off ª.
Setting the volume manually
Adjust the volume using the q control
knob during a navigation announcement.
or
Select + in the map view with the menu
shown and adjust the volume using the
q control knob.
Navigation system
Continuing route guidance
81
Route guidance
82
Navigation system
Avoiding a section of the route
blocked by a traffic jam
This function blocks a section of the route
ahead of you. You can set the length of the
blocked route section. If possible, COMAND
calculates a detour around the blocked section of the route.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To delete the blocked section: select
Delete while the message is shown and
press W to confirm.
COMAND calculates the route without the
block.
Selecting an alternative route
Introduction
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
With the "Alternative route" function, routes
other than the original one can be calculated.
Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
i Ensure that the "Alternative routes" set-
Select Detour and press W to confirm.
Option 1
To block a section of the route: select
Longer or Shorter repeatedly and confirm
using W until the desired section has been
selected.
i The total length of the section that can be
blocked is defined by the digital map. The
menu items are available accordingly.
ting is activated in the navigation menu
(option 2).
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Alternative route and press W
to confirm.
On the right-hand side, you will see information on the currently selected alternative route, e.g. distance, estimated remaining driving time and estimated time of
arrival. Route sections used (e.g. motorways, tunnels) are displayed as symbols.
: Length of the blocked route section
; Name of route section
= Blocked route section
To start route calculation: select Start
and press W to confirm.
Route 1 (example)
Route guidance
Displaying destination information
You can display destination information for
the destination, for both waypoints and the
intermediate stop, if they are part of the
route.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Destination information and
press W to confirm.
Destination information is displayed.
Route 4 (example: eco route)
The route is shown in the map with a green
line.
Option 2
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Select Calculate alternative routes
and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, the function is switched on O or off ª.
Function is activated: alternative routes
are calculated directly after the destination
is entered.
Menu functions
To select the next or previous alternative route: select Next or Previous and
press W to confirm.
To start route guidance using the selected alternative route: select Start and
press W to confirm.
COMAND calculates the alternative route.
Destination information (example)
The example shows:
Rthe
destination O
waypoints
Rthe relevant information on distance, estimated time of arrival and estimated
remaining driving time
Rtwo
i If a mobile phone is connected to
COMAND (Y page 114) and a phone number is included in the destination information, you can call it.
Navigation system
The route is shown in the map with a dark blue
line.
Route 1 is calculated with the current settings
for the route type and route options
(Y page 52). The alternative routes 2 to 4 are
calculated with the same route options as for
route 1. Route 4 is the economic route (eco
route).
83
Route guidance
Navigation system
84
To call up further destination information: turn cVd the COMAND controller.
To close the destination information:
slide XVY the COMAND controller or press
the % back button.
i If the first or last route section is highlighted, you cannot select Previous or
Next.
To zoom in or out of the map: select N
or M and press W to confirm.
To close the route overview: select
Back and press W to confirm.
Route overview
You can use the route overview to move along
the active route section by section and view
information and details about each section of
the route.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Route browser and press W to
confirm.
Route display
You can see the route before starting your
journey. This function is only available when
the vehicle is stationary.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Route in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Route demonstration and press
W to confirm.
The map with the crosshair appears.
To get to the destination: press W to
confirm the highlighted symbol.
To stop the route display: confirm the
Ë symbol by pressing W.
Route overview (example)
At the top of the display, you will see information about the highlighted route section,
for example the distance to be driven on the
road and road designation. The highlighted
route section is marked in white with a red
border on the map.
X To view the next or previous route section: select Next or Previous and press
W to confirm.
Route guidance
85
Calling up the "Routes" menu
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Route display stopped (example)
: Road name and location display
; Distance of the crosshair from current
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
X Select Routes.
vehicle position
To get to the current vehicle position:
press W to confirm the symbol for the current vehicle position.
To change the map scale: select Scale
and press W to confirm.
The scale bar appears.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Starting/ending recording
Recording the route
To start recording: select Start record‐
ing in the "Routes" menu by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The route is recorded and entered in a
list.#REC is displayed in red :.
To end recording: select End recording
in the "Routes" menu by turning cVd the
Notes
If you have activated COMAND and the SD
memory card has been inserted, you should
not take it out of the slot.
When you record a route, COMAND uses socalled support points and displays the route
as a series of lines. If the route is then calculated, COMAND attempts to align the recorded route with the digital map.
The support points of the route may not be on
a digitised road.
This is often the case with routes which are
drawn up using other map data and imported
via COMAND Online, e.g.:
Rroutes
from the Google™ special destination search (Y page 165)
Rroutes from the special destination download (Y page 168)
Navigation system
Route guidance
86
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Displaying and editing the recorded
route
Navigation system
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
Select List in the "Routes" menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Previously recorded routes are displayed.
Select a route and press W to confirm.
The map appears with a menu. The recorded route is shown in the map with a blue
dotted line.
Starting route calculation
X Select Start in the menu by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
COMAND attempts to align the recorded
route with the digital map.
Editing the route
You can change the route name and the icon.
X Select Edit in the menu by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
To change the route name: select
Rename and press W to confirm.
i The name cannot be changed while the
vehicle is in motion.
Turning off from the route on the map
X Select Demo by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The map with the crosshair appears.
Proceed as described in the "Route display"
section (Y page 84).
To change the icon: select Change icon
and press W to confirm.
A description for both entries can be found
in the "Personal special destinations" section under "Managing categories for personal special destinations" (Y page 72).
Changing direction for route calculation
You can set the icon for the route to the starting point or to the destination thereby changing the direction for route calculation.
i During route calculation, one-way streets
or turn restrictions, for example, are taken
into account. Therefore, the outward and
return routes may differ from each other.
Route guidance
Select Swap in the menu by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Deleting the route
X Select Delete in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the route
should be deleted.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the route will be deleted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Scanning the memory
The SD memory card is inserted.
X Select Memory in the "Routes" menu
(Y page 85) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The route memory is displayed.
gation announcements and displays on roads
known to the system.
Route guidance to an off-road destination (example)
: Off-road destination
; Off-road route section (dashed blue)
= Current vehicle position (the tip of the tri-
angle indicates the vehicle’s direction of
travel)
Shortly before you reach the last known point
on the map, you will hear the "Area of destination reached" announcement. The display
shows a direction arrow with the linear distance to the destination.
Route guidance from an off-road location to a destination
Off-road and off-map
Route guidance to a destination that is
not on a digitised road
COMAND can guide you to destinations
which are within the area covered by the digital map, but which are not themselves recorded on the map.
These destinations are known as off-road
destinations, which you can enter using the
map, for example. In these cases, COMAND
guides you for as long as possible with navi-
If the vehicle position is within the area covered by the digital map, but the map does not
contain any information about that location,
the vehicle is in an off-road location.
COMAND is also able to guide you to a destination even from an off-road location.
At the start of the route guidance, you will see
the Off road message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The arrow shows the
compass heading to the actual destination.
The route is highlighted blue, starting from
the last recognised street the vehicle was on
before it left the map.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way.
Navigation system
87
Dynamic route guidance
88
Navigation system
Route guidance from an off-map location to a destination
If the vehicle position is outside the area covered by the digital map, then the vehicle is in
an off-map location. COMAND is also able to
guide you to a destination even from an offmap location.
At the start of the route guidance, you will see
the Off road message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The arrow shows the
compass heading to the road left last.
The route is highlighted blue from the nearest
road known to the system.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
known to the system, route guidance continues in the usual way.
Off-road during route guidance
Due to roadworks, for example, there may be
differences between the data on the digital
map and the actual course of the road.
In such cases, the system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle position on the
digital map and thus considers the vehicle to
be in an off-road position.
In the display, you will see the Off road message, an arrow and the distance to the destination. The arrow shows the compass heading to the last road you were driving on.
As soon as the system can assign the vehicle
position to the map again, route guidance
continues in the usual way.
Dynamic route guidance
Introduction
An RDS-TMC radio station transmits RDSTMC traffic reports in addition to the radio
programme. COMAND can receive the RDSTMC traffic reports and take them into consideration for dynamic (traffic-dependent)
route guidance. The navigation system can,
for example, guide you around a traffic jam.
RDS-TMC is not available in all countries.
In Germany, COMAND uses the high-quality
traffic data from T-systems Traffic for the
TMCPro traffic jam warning system. In contrast to the public TMC service, TMCPro uses
exclusive traffic data that is detected with an
automated sensor network, in addition to the
messages generated by the TMC service. The
traffic data received from the traffic jam warning services named above could differ.
There may also be differences between the
traffic reports received and the actual road
and traffic conditions.
The respective traffic data being received
appears at the bottom right of the display with
the symbols "TMCPro" or "TMC". If there is no
reception, no symbol is displayed.
Switching dynamic route guidance
on/off
To switch on: set Dynamic route as the
route type6(Y page 52).
To switch off: select the Fast route or
Short route route type (Y page 52).
i COMAND calculates a new route if you
change the route type setting with route
guidance active. If you change the route
type setting when route guidance is inactive, COMAND uses the new setting for the
next route guidance.
RDS-TMC displays on the map
COMAND can show certain traffic incidents
on the map. These displays can be seen on
map scales 50 m (0.05 miles) to 20 km
(20 miles).
X To set the map scale: turn cVd the
COMAND controller until the desired map
scale is set.
Turning clockwise zooms out from the map;
turning anti-clockwise zooms in.
Traffic jam on the route (example)
i COMAND uses corresponding icons to
highlight the entire section of the affected
route, regardless of how long the incident
actually is. The icons are placed on the side
of the carriageway affected by the incident.
The following illustration shows the RDS-TMC
icons used.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select TMC in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm.
COMAND scans for RDS-TMC stations
within reception range.
No RDS-TMC station found: a message to
this effect appears.
X To close the message: confirm OK by pressing W the COMAND controller.
RDS-TMC station found: COMAND scans for
traffic reports.
If there are no traffic reports, you will see a
message to this effect.
X To close the message: confirm OK by pressing W the COMAND controller.
If there are traffic reports, you will see a list.
The content of the list depends on whether
route guidance is active.
List when route guidance is not active
The list shows all the roads, areas or regions
for which reports are available.
RDS-TMC icons
: Traffic jam on the route
; Slow-moving traffic on the route
= Road blocked
? Road blocked
A Traffic jam (red)
B Slow-moving traffic (yellow)
: To call up TMC icon information
; Icon for warning message
Displaying RDS-TMC traffic reports
Displaying the report list
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
= Country designation
? Road affected
i A report may also relate to an area or
region rather than a road, e.g. impaired visibility due to fog.
89
Navigation system
Dynamic route guidance
Dynamic route guidance
90
To show traffic report: select a road
(area, region) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
You will find an example of a traffic report
on (Y page 91).
To show TMC symbols: select TMC sym‐
bol information by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Navigation system
: To display all reports (including those not
affecting the route)
; To have traffic reports read out on route
(Y page 91)
= Affected roads, areas or regions (only
available when there are traffic reports for
the route)
To show all traffic reports: select Dis‐
play all messages and press W to confirm.
You will see a list of all roads, areas or
regions for which reports are available,
including those that do not affect the route.
To show a traffic report: select a road, an
area or a region and press W to confirm.
You will find an example of a traffic report
below.
To exit the list: slide XVY the COMAND
controller once or several times.
Example display
: Affected section of motorway
; Icon for incident (traffic jam in the exam-
ple shown)
= Icon display for the section of route affec-
ted
To show the next/previous incident:
select Next or Previous (if available) and
press W to confirm.
To show the detailed view: select
Details and press W to confirm.
To scroll the map: select Map and press
W to confirm.
You can move the map (Y page 61) to enable further traffic reports to be displayed.
List when route guidance is active
By default, the list shows the roads, areas and
regions that lie along the route and are affected by traffic reports.
Dynamic route guidance
Example message
91
Reading out traffic reports on the
route
The read-aloud function is only available
when route guidance is active. You can set
the language (Y page 47) and the text reader
speed (Y page 44).
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select TMC in the navigation system menu
bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm.
Select Read out all messages on
route and press W to confirm.
COMAND reads out the messages in
sequence.
: Depending on your selection: Messages
on the route or All messages
; Icon for report type (e.g. warning mes-
sage)
= Country designation
? Road, area or region for which there is a
traffic report
A Report 1 of 1 (example) for the road affec-
ted
B Report text
The icons for possible report types are shown
below.
i The Read out all messages on
route menu item has no function if there
are no reports relating to the route.
To cancel the read-aloud function: select
Cancel read-aloud function and press
W to confirm.
The current traffic report is read out to the
end and the function is then deactivated.
or
: Traffic jam
; Slow-moving traffic
= Warning message
? Road blocked
To scroll within a report or to access
the next report: turn cVd the COMAND
controller.
To return to the list of messages: press
W or slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Press the 8 button briefly.
The function is deactivated immediately.
i COMAND interrupts the read-aloud function automatically as it recalculates the
route following a new RDS-TMC traffic
announcement.
Automatic read-aloud function
You can have TMC traffic reports on your
route read aloud automatically. Announcements are made as you approach traffic incidents.
Navigation system
Calling up traffic reports
Destination memory
Navigation system
92
To switch the automatic read-aloud
function on/off: select Navi in the main
function bar by sliding ZV and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Select Read traffic messages auto‐
matically and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, the function is switched on O or off ª.
Option 1: destination memory list with
character bar
Select From memory and press W to confirm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
as a selection list (option 2).
Destination memory
Home address (My address)
Entering the home address via address
entry
Initially proceed as described in the "Adopting an address book entry as a home
address" and confirm My address by
pressing W.
X To enter the home address for the first
time: confirm New entry by pressing W.
X To change the home address: select
Change in the menu showing the home
address by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Confirm New entry by pressing W.
X In both cases, enter the home address as a
destination, e.g. as a town, street and
house number (Y page 53). Then save the
home address (Y page 57).
: Entry contains data that can be used for
navigation
; To call up options
Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the destination memory list
appears as a selection list.
Option 2: destination memory list as a
selection list
Adopting an address book entry as a
home address
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Dest. in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
The My address entry is listed as the first
entry in the destination memory.
X Select My address by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
i If you have not yet entered any charac-
ters, the My address entry is automatically
highlighted in the selection list.
Destination memory
i If you select New entry, you are also
offered the option of entering the home
address for the first time. You can then
save the home address without having to
start route guidance.
To enter the home address for the first
time: select Assign to address book
entry and press W to confirm.
To change the home address: select
Change and press W to confirm.
X Select Assign to address book entry
and press W to confirm.
i If you select New entry, you are also
offered the option of changing the home
address by entering an address. You can
then save the Home address without having to start route guidance.
Selecting the home address for route
guidance
Select Home or Work and press W to confirm.
Select Home or Work and press W to confirm.
In both cases, you will see the address book
either with the character bar or as a selection list.
To select an address book entry: proceed as described in the "Searching for an
address book entry" section
(Y page 141).
X To confirm the selection: press W the
COMAND controller.
If no home address has been stored,
COMAND saves the entry. You will see a
message and then the address menu with
the selected address. Start is highlighted
automatically.
If a home address has already been stored,
you will see a prompt asking you whether
the My address entry should be overwritten.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND overwrites the
destination. You will see a message and
then the address menu with the selected
address. Start is highlighted automatically.
If you select No, the list will appear again.
Proceed as described in the "Selecting a
destination from the destination memory"
section (Y page 59).
Storing a destination in the destination memory
Notes
This function also stores the destination in
the address book.
When the address book is full, no destinations
can be saved in the destination memory. You
must first delete address book entries
(Y page 141).
After destination entry
The destination has been entered and is
shown in the address entry menu
(Y page 56).
X Select Save by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You can now select storage options
(Y page 94).
During route guidance
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Dest. in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
Navigation system
If no home address has been stored yet, you
can now assign an address book entry. If a
home address already exists, it is displayed
and you can alter it.
93
Destination memory
94
Select Save destination and press W to
confirm.
You can now select storage options
(Y page 94).
To save the destination with a name:
select Save with name and press W to
confirm.
Select a category, e.g. Home, and press W
to confirm.
The input menu appears with data fields
and the character bar.
Navigation system
From the list of previous destinations
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Dest. in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
Select From last destinations and
press W to confirm.
The list of last destinations appears.
Select a destination by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The destination address is shown.
Select Save and press W to confirm.
You can now select storage options.
Selecting storing options
To save the destination without a
name: select Save without name and
press W to confirm.
COMAND stores the destination in the destination memory and uses the address as
the destination name.
X To save the destination as My address:
select Save as "My Address" and press
W to confirm.
COMAND stores the destination in the destination memory as My address. If the
selected address book entry already contains address data that can be used for
navigation (L icon), a prompt will appear
asking whether you wish to overwrite the
existing data.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry is overwritten.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Saving a destination with a name (example)
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
Proceed as described under "Entering characters using the character bar" in the
"Entering characters in navigation mode
(entering a town)" section (Y page 28).
X Then, select ¬ and press W to confirm.
COMAND stores the destination under the
name entered.
Assigning a destination to an address
book entry
An address with complete address data that
is suitable for navigation can be assigned to
a pre-existing address book entry. You can
then later start route guidance to this address
straight from the address book
(Y page 143).
X Select Assign to address book entry
and press W to confirm.
Select a category, e.g. Home, and press W
to confirm.
You will see the address book either with
the character bar or as a selection list.
Previous destinations
To select an address book entry: proceed as described in the "Searching for an
address book entry" section
(Y page 141).
COMAND stores the data if the address
book entry selected does not yet contain
navigable address data.
If the selected address book entry already
contains navigable address data, a prompt
will appear asking whether you wish to
overwrite the existing data.
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Dest. in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and pressing W to confirm.
Select From memory and press W to confirm.
You will see the destination memory list
either with the character bar (option 1) or
as a selection list (option 2).
Option 1: destination memory list with
character bar: proceed as described in the
"Entering characters using the character
bar" section (Y page 28).
Option 2: destination memory list as
selection list: select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You see the address data of the selected
entry.
Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the destination.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the
destination. You will see a message to this
effect.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
i If the navigable address data for the destination being deleted is also assigned to
an address book entry, COMAND will also
delete this data from there. If the corresponding address book entry does not contain any further data, such as telephone
numbers, COMAND deletes the entire
address book entry.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND stores the data.
Deleting a destination or the home
address from the destination memory
Previous destinations
Introduction
COMAND automatically stores the previous
destinations for which the route calculation
has been started. If the memory is full,
COMAND deletes the oldest destination. You
can also save a destination from the list of
previous destinations in the destination memory. It will be stored there permanently.
Storing a destination permanently in
the destination memory
Proceed as described in the "From the list
of previous destinations" section
(Y page 94).
Storing the vehicle position in the list
of previous destinations
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Navigation system
95
Map operation and settings
96
Select Save vehicle position and press
W to confirm.
COMAND stores the current vehicle position as a destination in the list of previous
destinations.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry is deleted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Navigation system
Map operation and settings
Storing the crosshair position in the
list of previous destinations
A crosshair appears on the map if you have
moved the map manually. You can store the
crosshair position as a destination in the list
of previous destinations.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Note
Company logos displayed on the map are
trademarks of the respective companies and
used solely for the purpose of indicating the
location of these companies. The use of such
logos on the map does not indicate approval
of, support of or advertising by these companies for the navigation system itself.
Setting the map scale
Select Save crosshair position and
press W to confirm.
To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full screen
menu item is shown, press W.
Deleting one of the previous destinations
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Destination in the navigation system menu bar by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
To call up the scale bar: as soon as you
turn cVd the COMAND controller, scale
bar ? appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
: Currently set map scale expressed as a
number with unit, in this case 500 m
Select From last destinations and
press W to confirm.
The list of last destinations appears.
; New map scale
Select the desired destination and press
W to confirm.
The destination address appears.
? Map scale
Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
= Currently set map scale as indicated by
the needle on the scale bar
Unit of measurement : in the COMAND display depends on the selection made for the
instrument cluster (see the vehicle Owner's
Manual).
Map operation and settings
Showing the crosshair
To hide the menu: slide ZV the COMAND
controller and, when the Full screen
menu item is shown, press W.
To move the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or
aVb the COMAND controller.
A crosshair appears on the map. If you slide
it again, the map moves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair.
Centring the map on the vehicle or
destination position
Centring the map on the vehicle position
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Select Vehicle position map and press
W to confirm or, if the crosshair is shown,
press the % back button.
This hides the crosshair.
Centring on the destination
Map with crosshair
: Current vehicle position
; Crosshair
= Details of the crosshair position
This function requires that a route to a destination has been calculated. If the route
includes waypoints and an intermediate stop,
the map can also be set to these positions.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Select Destination position map and
press W to confirm.
The crosshair position is set to the relevant
destination.
? Map scale selected
Display = may be the name of a street, for
example, provided the digital map contains
the necessary data. Alternatively, it may show
the geo-coordinate position of the crosshair
if the Geo-coordinates display is switched
on (Y page 100).
Hiding the crosshair and centring the
map on the vehicle position or destination
Calling up the map settings menu
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Press the % back button twice.
The crosshair disappears and the map is
set to the vehicle position.
or
Set the map to the vehicle position; see the
explanation below.
Map settings
Navigation system
Moving the map
97
Map operation and settings
98
Navigation system
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
Select Map orientation and press W to
confirm.
A # dot indicates the current setting.
Setting the map orientation
Map orientation menu
Map orientation
: Current map orientation
The following display modes are possible:
North orientation (the map view is displayed so that north is always up).
R¤ Orientation in direction of travel (the
map is displayed so that the direction of
travel is always up; the orange point of the
icon points north).
R¤ Bird's-eye view (the map is displayed so
that the direction of travel is always up; the
map projection reproduces the curvature
of the earth and the orange point of the icon
points north).
R¤ 3D map (the map is displayed so that
the heading is always up; at a scale of
1 km or less, the map displays elevation;
the orange point of the icon points north)
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
R0
Select North up, Heading up, Bird'seye view or 3-D map by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A # dot indicates the new setting.
Setting the special destination icons in
the map
You can set the special destinations you wish
to have displayed as symbols on the map.
Special destinations are, for example, filling
stations, hotels, cinemas and restaurants.
The following settings are possible:
RStandard
symbols
Symbol display determined by the factory
settings.
RPersonal symbols
You can determine the symbols yourself.
RNo symbols
The map does not show any symbols.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
Select POI symbols on map and press
W to confirm.
displays for more than one special destination.
X To switch all personal symbols on/off:
select All and confirm with W.
Depending on the previous state of the personal symbols, they will either be shown
O or hidden ª.
If the function is switched on O, the individual special destinations are greyed out
and the previously selected settings remain
unchanged.
If the function is switched off ª, you can
reselect the individual special destinations.
They show the most recently selected settings.
i The list shows all symbols that are con-
Select Standard symbols, Personal
symbols or No symbols.
If you select Personal symbols, the list of
special destinations appears.
tained on the digital map across all countries. However, not all special destinations
are available in all countries. As a result,
certain special destination symbols may
not be displayed on the map, even if the
symbol display is switched on.
To exit the menu: press the % back
button.
Map information in the display
Showing text information
During route guidance, you can have map
information displayed at the bottom edge of
the display.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
To switch the symbol display on/off:
select a special destination by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Depending on the previous state of the
symbols, they will either be shown O or
hidden ª. You can switch on the symbol
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
Select Text information on map and
press W to confirm.
A # dot indicates the current setting.
99
Navigation system
Map operation and settings
Map operation and settings
100
Navigation system
Road display
Road display active
: Road name or designation
Select Arrival time / Distance, Cur‐
rent street, Geo-coordinates or None
and press W to confirm.
To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
controller.
Geo-coordinate display
Arrival time/distance to the destination
Geo-coordinate display active
: Current height above average sea level
(rounded to the nearest 10 m)
; Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-
nates
= Current vehicle position: longitude coorArrival time/distance display switched on
: Icon for destination
; Distance to the destination
= Estimated time of arrival
You can only see this display during route
guidance. While scrolling the map
(Y page 61), you will see additional data, e.g.
road names, depending on the crosshair position, if the digital map supports this data.
i During route calculation, or if the vehicle
is travelling on a non-digitised road, the linear distance to the destination is shown. In
this case, the display will be greyed out.
dinates
? Number of GPS satellites currently being
used
There must be sufficient GPS reception for all
displays to be shown. If this is not the case,
the display will be greyed out. Height display : may vary from the actual value,
because the navigation system uses the GPS
signals for the calculation.
While scrolling the map (Y page 61), you will
see the geo-coordinates of the crosshair position. Height display : and number of satellites used ? are not displayed.
Map operation and settings
101
Display switched off
: Current map orientation
i While scrolling the map, you can see addi-
Topographical map (example)
tional data, depending on the position of
the crosshair, such as a road name, if the
digital map supports this data.
Motorway information
Switching the topographical map on/
off
The topographical map uses different colours
to depict elevation. The colour key generally
reflects the topography's dominant vegetation or the ground's perceived colour when
seen from the air, for example:
When driving on motorways, you can have the
nearest filling stations, rest areas, etc., as
well as your current distance from them,
shown on the right-hand side of the display.
X To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
(grass) for lowland
Ryellow, brown (woodland) for hills
Rgrey (stone) and white (snow) for mountains.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
Select Motorway information and press
W to confirm.
Depending on the previous state, switch
the option on O or off ª.
Select Topographic map and press W to
confirm.
Depending on the previous state, switch
the option on O or off ª.
Rgreen
Motorway information (example)
Navigation system
"None" menu option
Map operation and settings
102
The entries show the number of the motorway
and motorway exits as well as their distance
from the vehicle's current position.
Switching the city model on/off
Navigation system
When the city model is switched on, the map
shows buildings as 3D models.
i The city model is only shown for "Bird's-
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
Select Next intersecting street and
press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous state, switch
the option on O or off ª.
eye view" or "3D map".
It is available for map scales 50 m and
100 m.
The data required for displaying buildings
is not available for all towns.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
Intersecting street (example: city route)
Select City (3D) and press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous state, switch
the option on O or off ª.
Intersecting street (example: motorway route)
Coordinates on the map
City model (example)
Showing/hiding intersecting streets
If route guidance is inactive, intersecting
streets can be shown on the upper edge of
the display.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map settings and press W to confirm.
The map settings menu appears.
Additional settings
Select Compass on map and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Never, When street unknown or
When route guidance inactive and
press W to confirm.
The selected setting is accepted.
COMAND display directly above the map
scale indicator, e.g. "120" or "80 when wet".
The displays also appear in the multifunction
display in the Assistance menu (see vehicle
Owner's Manual).
i The speed limits displayed may be incorrect if:
Rthe
data is outdated.
camera has failed to identify a traffic
sign correctly.
Rthe
Switching Speed Limit Assist on/off
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Speed Limit Assist and press
W to confirm.
Depending on the previous state, switch
the option on O or off ª.
Topographical 3D map with compass (example)
Speed Limit Assist
Information and requirements
If COMAND supports Speed Limit Assist and
the function is switched on in COMAND, it can
show the permissible speed limit in the
COMAND display.
Additional settings
i The display appears if Speed Limit Assist
General information
detects traffic signs stating the maximum
permissible speed. Speed Limit Assist
detects these traffic signs using a camera
(see the vehicle Owner's Manual).
Avoiding an area
Rwhen
COMAND makes it possible to avoid areas
you do not wish to drive through.
If you activate or deactivate a route block
while route guidance is active, COMAND will
calculate a new route. If you activate or deactivate a route block while route guidance is
inactive, COMAND will use the new setting for
the next route guidance.
Rwhen
i Motorways within blocked areas are
Restricted speed limits may also be displayed.
Restrictions include:
wet – applies only if the road is wet
icy – applies only if the road is slippery (due to cold)
Rin fog – applies only in foggy weather
Rtemporary – applies only at certain times
RLimited – COMAND cannot identify the
type of restriction
If corresponding data is available, you see the
information at the bottom left of the
always taken into consideration in the
route calculation.
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Navigation system
103
Additional settings
Navigation system
104
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Avoid area and press W to confirm.
If you have not yet set an area to be avoided, a menu appears (option 1).
If you have already set one or more areas
to be avoided, a list appears (option 2).
Option 1: the menu appears
The crosshair marks the centre of the area
that is to be avoided.
X To move the map: slide XVY, ZVÆ or
aVb the COMAND controller.
To set the map scale: as soon as you turn
cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar
appears. Turning clockwise zooms out from
the map; turning anti-clockwise zooms in.
Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
To apply a block: press W the COMAND
controller.
A red square appears on the map.
To adjust the size of the square: turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
The square is enlarged or reduced.
To confirm the settings: press W.
The list appears. The previously selected
area to be avoided has been added and
activated.
Follow the instructions listed under "Option
2: the list appears".
Select Using map, From memory or From
personal POIs and press W to confirm.
If you select Using map, the map with the
crosshair appears.
If you select From memory or From per‐
sonal POIs, either the destination memory (Y page 92) or a menu (Y page 74)
appears.
X Select a destination and press W to confirm.
X When the destination address is displayed,
select Map and press W to confirm.
The map appears.
Additional settings
Option 2: the list appears
i Available list places are named Area
 and are shown in grey.
Select Avoid new area by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
: New area to be avoided, the size of which
can still be adjusted
; Area currently being avoided
Switching an avoided area on/off
Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The avoided area is switched on O or off
ª depending on the previous status.
Displaying and changing an avoided
area
Select Using map, From memory or From
personal POIs and press W to confirm.
If you select Using map, the map with the
crosshair appears.
If you select From memory or From per‐
sonal POIs, either the destination memory (Y page 92) or a menu (Y page 74)
appear.
X Select destination and press W to confirm.
X When the destination address is displayed,
select Map and press W to confirm.
The map appears.
Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller.
X Select Options by sliding VY the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
Select Display/Change and press W to
confirm.
The area to be avoided is indicated in the
map.
To change the location of the area: slide
the COMAND controller XVY, ZVÆ or
aVb.
The area is moved on the map.
Proceed according to the instructions
under "Option 1: the menu appears" if you
Navigation system
wish to set a new area to be avoided in the
map.
The following illustration shows an example
with two areas that are to be avoided.
"Avoid area" list (example)
105
Additional settings
Navigation system
106
To adjust the size of the area: turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
The area is enlarged or reduced.
To confirm the change: press W the
COMAND controller.
The list appears and the change is entered.
Deleting a set area
Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller.
X Select Options by sliding VY the
COMAND controller and pressing W to
confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A query appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the entry is deleted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Compass function
In the compass view, you can see the current
direction of travel, the current height above
sea level and the coordinates of the vehicle
position, for example.
To switch on navigation mode: press the
Ø function button.
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Position in the navigation system
menu bar by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Select Compass and press W to confirm.
Compass (example)
: Current direction of travel
; Current height above average sea level,
rounded
= Current vehicle position: longitude coor-
dinates
? Number of GPS satellites currently being
used
A Current vehicle position: latitude coordi-
nates
B Currently set steering angle of the front
wheels
i To display current height ;, the system
must be able to receive at least four satellites. Steering angle B can be a maximum
of 35° in both directions.
To exit the display: confirm Back by pressing W or press the % button.
Showing the map data version
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
Select Navi in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Map version and press W to confirm.
The map data version number is shown.
Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a MercedesBenz Service Centre.
Additional settings
107
Updating process
Updating the digital map
Introduction
The digital maps generated by the map software become outdated in the same way as
conventional road maps. Optimal route guidance can only be provided by the navigation
system in conjunction with the most up-todate map software.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre. You can have the digital map
updated there with a DVD, or you can update
it yourself.
i The update process can take a long time
(over an hour), depending on the size of the
digital map. During this time, you will only
be able to switch on radio mode and to
accept incoming calls. The update will be
completed more quickly if the vehicle is
stationary.
If you carry out the update with the engine
switched off and the starter battery has
insufficient power, COMAND may automatically switch off during the process in order
to protect the battery. If this occurs, restart
the update with the engine running.
G Risk of poisoning
Never run the engine in an enclosed space.
The exhaust fumes contain poisonous carbon
monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes is hazardous to your health and can lead to loss of consciousness and death.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
insert the DVD into the DVD single drive
(Y page 193) or the DVD changer
(Y page 193).
COMAND checks whether the digital map
on the DVD is compatible with the navigation system and system software.
A prompt then appears asking if you want
to install the database. Versions of the
database currently installed and the database that is to be installed are displayed.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
After selecting Yes, an activation code
must be entered when installing a database
for the first time. You will receive the activation code when you buy the navigation
DVD.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
X Enter the activation code.
After entering the activation code correctly, COMAND starts updating the digital
map. Once the update is finished, you will
see a message.
X To confirm the message: press W the
COMAND controller.
X Take the DVD out of the slot.
While the update is running, you will see a
message to this effect and a progress bar. The
navigation system is not operational until the
update is complete.
i You cannot eject the DVD during the
update. If you switch off COMAND during
the update, the update is interrupted. It
then continues from where it was interrupted when the system is restarted.
COMAND may prompt you to change the DVD
during the update.
X Press the V (for DVD changer) or
8 (for DVD single drive) load/eject button.
Take the DVD out of the slot.
Navigation system
Additional settings
Navigation system
108
Insert the requested DVD.
Once the update has been successfully
completed, you will see a message to this
effect.
To confirm the message: press W the
COMAND controller.
Take the DVD out of the slot.
The update is complete.
If the update is not successfully completed,
you will see a message that the map update
is not possible.
To confirm the message: press W the
COMAND controller.
Take the DVD out of the slot.
Problems with the navigation system
109
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
COMAND is unable to
continue route guidance after the journey
has been interrupted.
Route guidance is cancelled if you interrupt the journey for more
than two hours.
"Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle.
"Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND back on
and driving on.
X Continue route guidance (Y page 81).
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
COMAND is unable to COMAND has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the
determine the vehicle's vehicle has been transported (e.g. by ferry, by motorail or after
position.
towing).
X Start the vehicle and pull away.
COMAND determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the
driving situation, this may take some time.
Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of
the vehicle's position.
When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with
navigation announcements and route guidance displays.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
COMAND has an integrated hard drive on which the digital map is
The Navigation
unavailable message stored.
appears.
To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, COMAND
deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The navigation
system will then be temporarily unavailable.
X Let the vehicle and COMAND cool down.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.
If an area of the hard disk has a fault, COMAND can no longer
access the map data in this area, for example when calculating a
route.
X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.
The navigation system will be operational again until it has to
access the faulty area of the hard drive once more. The message
will then reappear.
X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Navigation system
Problems with the navigation system
110
Problems with the navigation system
Navigation system
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You see a message
The DVD containing the digital map cannot be used for the update.
informing you that the X To confirm the message: press W the COMAND controller.
DVD containing the digital map is incompatible X Eject the DVD.
X Have the system database checked at a Mercedes-Benz Service
with the system softCentre.
ware.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The map software
update has failed.
The DVD is dirty.
X Clean the DVD.
Restart the update.
The DVD is scratched.
X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle
interior.
X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down.
Restart the update.
COMAND's integral hard drive is faulty.
X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
COMAND asks for an
activation code during
the map update.
The digital map is secured with an activation code.
X Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
111
Vehicle equipment ............................ 112
General notes .................................... 112
Switching between Bluetooth® and
convenience telephony ....................
Reception and transmission volume
Telephone operation .........................
Using the phone book ......................
Using call lists ...................................
Using the speed-dial list ...................
Text message (SMS) .........................
Using the address book ...................
Mercedes-Benz Contact ...................
121
122
123
128
133
136
137
140
147
Telephone
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface .................................................... 114
Convenience telephony .................... 119
112
General notes
Vehicle equipment
i These Operating Instructions describe all
Telephone
standard and optional equipment available
for your vehicle at the time it was purchased. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features described.
General notes
Introduction
COMAND offers three types of telephony:
RBluetooth® interface telephony
RConvenience telephony
RSAP telephony
i As an enhancement to convenience telephony, a permanently installed telephone
can be fitted (Bluetooth® telephone module with SAP profile). In addition to a SIM
card slot, mobile phones, which support
the SIM Access Profile (SAP), can also be
connected to it.
SAP telephony is described in separate
operating instructions.
When connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phones with PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) or a convenience telephone, the contacts
are automatically downloaded to COMAND.
Basic telephony, in conjunction with a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone, enables you to
phone via the Bluetooth interface. With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the handsfree system and receive vCards via the Bluetooth® interface.
If your vehicle is equipped with convenience
telephony, you can obtain mobile phone
brackets for specific mobile phones at your
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and have
them installed in the armrest.
In the bracket the mobile phone battery is
charged and a connection is made to the
vehicle's exterior aerial.
Using a suitable mobile phone, the hands-free
system is available with convenience telephony.
You can use the text message function
(receiving and reading) if the following conditions are met:
Rthe
mobile phone bracket and the mobile
phone support the function (convenience
telephony)
Rthe mobile phone supports the MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access Profile),
(basic telephony).
i If your vehicle is equipped with convenience telephony, you can still connect a
Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone to
COMAND via the Bluetooth® interface.
You can obtain more detailed information
about suitable mobile phones and about connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile phones to
COMAND from your Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre or on the Internet (http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect).
Safety notes
G Risk of accident
You must observe the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating mobile communications
equipment in the vehicle.
If it is permitted to operate communications
equipment while the vehicle is in motion, you
may only operate such equipment when road
and traffic conditions permit. You may otherwise be distracted from the traffic conditions,
cause an accident and injure yourself and others.
Two-way radios or fax machines without lowreflection exterior aerials may interfere with
the vehicle electronics and thereby compromise the operational safety of the vehicle and
your safety. Therefore, only use these if they
are properly connected to a separate, lowreflection exterior aerial.
General notes
Excessive electromagnetic radiation may constitute a health hazard to yourself and others.
There is scientific discussion surrounding the
possible health risks posed by electromagnetic fields. You can reduce this risk by using
an exterior aerial.
Therefore, only use mobile communication
equipment if it is connected to the exterior
aerial of the vehicle.
Call disconnection while the vehicle is
in motion
A call may be disconnected if:
Function restrictions
You will not be able to use the telephone, will
no longer be able to use the telephone, or you
may have to wait before using it, in the following situations:
Rwhen
off in COMAND
the Bluetooth® function is switched
off on the mobile phone if you are using
Bluetooth® interface telephony
Rif the mobile phone is not logged into a
mobile phone network
Rwhen
i The telephone automatically tries to log
on to a network. If no network is available,
you may not be able to make a "999" or
"112" emergency call. If you attempt to
make an outgoing call, the No Service
message will appear for a short while.
Rthere is insufficient GSM network coverage
in certain areas.
move from one GSM or UMTS transmitter/receiver area (GSM/UMTS cell) into
another and no channels are free.
Ryou use a SIM card which is not compatible
with the network available.
Ryou are using a mobile phone with "Twincard" and the mobile phone with the second SIM card is already logged into the network.
Ryou
Operating options
You can operate the telephone by:
Rusing
the COMAND controller:
turn cVd.
slide XVY or ZVÆ.
press W.
Rpressing the 6 or ~ button and
using the telephone keypad on COMAND
Rthe 6 or ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel
Rusing LINGUATRONIC (see the separate
LINGUATRONIC operating instructions)
Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions and
illustrations in this section refer to COMAND.
the mobile phone is switched off
Rwhen the "Bluetooth®" function is switched
If you switch COMAND off during a call in
hands-free mode, the call will be terminated.
You can prevent this as follows:
Bluetooth® interface telephony
Switch the mobile phone to "Private mode"
before switching off COMAND (see the
mobile phone operating instructions).
Convenience telephony
Before switching off COMAND, remove the
mobile phone from the bracket and, if necessary, switch the mobile phone to "Private
mode" (see the mobile phone operating
instructions).
"999" or "112" emergency call
The following conditions must be fulfilled in
order to make a 112 emergency call:
Rthe
mobile phone must be switched on.
network must be available.
Ra valid and operational SIM card must be
inserted in the mobile phone.
Rthe PIN must have been entered.
Ra
Telephone
G Risk of injury
113
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
114
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
must arrange rescue measures yourself.
i The 999 or 112 emergency call number
is a public service. Any misuse is punishable by law.
Telephone
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
Conditions
On the mobile phone
If your vehicle is equipped with convenience
telephony and you wish to make calls via the
Bluetooth® interface, your mobile phone
should not be inserted in the mobile phone
bracket or connected to the mobile phone
bracket. Doing so could result in a malfunction, depending on the type of mobile phone.
For telephony via COMAND's Bluetooth®
interface, a Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phone is required.
Not all mobile phones available on the market
are equally suitable. You can obtain more
detailed information about suitable mobile
phones and about connecting Bluetooth®capable mobile phones to COMAND from
your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the
Internet (http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect).
The battery of the mobile phone should
always be kept sufficiently charged in order
to prevent malfunctions.
In preparation for telephoning via the Bluetooth® interface, you should check the following items on your mobile phone (see the
mobile phone operating instructions):
Hands-Free Profile
The mobile phone must support HandsFree Profile 1.0 or above.
i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength)
depend on the supported version of the
Hands-Free Profile.
Bluetooth® visibility
On certain mobile phones, the device itself
must be made "visible" for other devices,
as well as activating the Bluetooth® function (see the mobile phone operating
instructions).
X Bluetooth® device name
Every Bluetooth® device has its own Bluetooth® device name. This device name is
freely definable, but can be identical for all
devices from the same manufacturer. It is
therefore recommended that you change
this name so that you can easily recognise
your mobile phone (see the mobile phone
operating instructions).
Switch on the mobile phone and enter the
PIN when prompted to do so (see the
mobile phone operating instructions).
Activate Bluetooth® functions and, where
necessary, Bluetooth® visibility on the
mobile phone (see the mobile phone operating instructions).
On COMAND
Activate the Bluetooth® function in
COMAND (Y page 46).
Connecting a mobile phone
General information
Before using your mobile phone with
COMAND for the first time, you will need to
connect it.
When you authorise a new mobile phone, it is
connected automatically.
Connecting comprises:
Rsearching
for a Bluetooth®-capable mobile
phone
Rsubsequently
authorising it
You can connect up to 15 mobile phones.
During connection, the phone book, call lists
and text messages are automatically downloaded to COMAND.
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
Searching for a mobile phone
= Mobile phone in range and authorised
(L appears in black)
? Newly detected mobile phone within
range but not yet authorised (no icon yet
Y)
Select Bluetooth telephones and press
W to confirm.
Select Update and press W to confirm.
COMAND searches for Bluetooth® telephones within range and adds them to the
Bluetooth® telephone list.
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth® telephones within
range and their characteristics.
i Mobile phones which are connected to
the optionally available permanently installed telephone (Bluetooth® telephone module with SAP profile), are displayed in their
own telephone list. These can be called up
by selecting the SAP telephones menu
item, see the separate operating instructions.
The Bluetooth® telephones list shows all
mobile phones within range and all previously
authorised mobile phones, whether or not
they are in range.
i If the Bluetooth® telephones list is already
full, you will be requested to de-authorise a
mobile phone (Y page 118). If COMAND
does not find your mobile phone, external
authorisation (Y page 116) may be necessary.
i If you call up the telephone list again, the
unauthorised devices are removed from
the list. In this case, start a new search to
update the Bluetooth® telephone list.
Authorising (registering) a mobile
phone
Option 1: using the passcode (access
code)
X In the Bluetooth® telephones list, select the
not yet authorised mobile phone by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Authorise and press W to confirm.
The input menu for the passkey appears.
Bluetooth® phone list (example)
: Currently connected # and authorised
mobile phone Y
; Mobile phone not within range but previ-
ously authorised (L appears in grey)
Telephone
Press the % function button on
COMAND.
X Select Telephone in the telephone basic
menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
115
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
116
The passcode is any one to sixteen-digit number combination which you can determine
yourself. You must enter the same number
combination in COMAND and in the Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone (see the operating instructions of the mobile phone).
i Some mobile phones require the input of
Telephone
a four-digit passcode or longer number
sequences.
If you want to re-authorise a mobile phone
following de-authorisation, you can select a
different passcode.
X To enter a passcode in COMAND: press
the number keys in turn.
¬ is highlighted after the first number
has been entered.
or
X Select the digits in the digit bar one by one
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm. Then, select
¬.
To confirm an entry in COMAND: press
W the COMAND controller.
Now enter the same passcode in the mobile
phone.
To make entries on the mobile phone: if
the Bluetooth® connection is successful, you
will be requested to enter the passcode
(access code, passkey) (see mobile phone
operating instructions).
X Enter the same passcode in the mobile
phone as already entered in COMAND.
i After entering the passcode, you may also
need to enter a confirmation in your mobile
phone to connect calls. Please check your
mobile phone display.
If the COMAND display shows the message: Authorisation procedure
unsuccessful, you may have exceeded
the prescribed time period. Repeat the procedure.
The mobile phone is connected to COMAND
(authorised). You can now phone using the
COMAND hands-free system.
Option 2: via Secure Simple Pairing
The mobile phone (or the Bluetooth® audio
device) must support the Bluetooth® version
2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing.
COMAND creates a six-digit code, which is
displayed on both devices that are to be connected.
If the code is the same on both devices,
confirm Yes by pressing W.
If you select Yes, authorisation continues
and the mobile phone is connected.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Confirm the message on the mobile phone.
External authorisation
If COMAND does not detect your mobile
phone, this may be due to particular security
settings on your mobile phone. In this case,
you can test if your mobile phone can find
COMAND. The Bluetooth® device name of
COMAND is MB Bluetooth.
Please note the following: some mobile
phones require that you establish the connection to COMAND again once you have
entered the passcode (see the mobile phone
operating instructions). The mobile phone
cannot otherwise be authorised.
X
Press the % function button on
COMAND.
X Select Telephone in the telephone basic
menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Bluetooth telephones and press
W to confirm.
X Select Update.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select External authorisation and
press W to confirm.
Start the Bluetooth® search on the mobile
phone (see the mobile phone operating
instructions).
X Select COMAND (MB Bluetooth) on the
mobile phone.
X Option 1: when requested to do so, enter
the passkey first on the mobile phone and
then in COMAND.
X Option 2: confirm the displayed codes on
the mobile phone and in COMAND (Secure
Simple Pairing).
Select the mobile phone in the Bluetooth®
telephones list by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The selected mobile phone is searched for
and connected if it is within Bluetooth®
range and if Bluetooth® is activated.
Only one mobile phone can be connected
at any one time. The currently connected
mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in
the Bluetooth® telephones list
(Y page 115).
Displaying details
Press the % function button on
COMAND.
X Select Telephone in the telephone basic
menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Bluetooth telephones and press
W to confirm.
X Select the desired mobile phone in the
Bluetooth® telephones list.
Automatic reconnection
COMAND always searches for the last connected mobile phone.
If no connection can be made to the most
recently connected mobile phone, the system
searches for the mobile phone which was
connected before that one.
Connecting another mobile phone
If you have authorised more than one mobile
phone, you can switch between the individual
phones.
Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
RBluetooth® name
RBluetooth® address
Ravailability status (is shown after a new
search)
Rauthorisation status
X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or
slide XVY the COMAND controller.
i You can only switch to another authorised
phone if you are not currently making a call.
117
Telephone
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
Telephony via the Bluetooth® interface
118
De-registering (de-authorising) a
mobile phone
i Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authorisation in COMAND and on the mobile
phone. Subsequent authorisation may otherwise fail.
Telephone
Press the % function button on
COMAND.
X Select Telephone in the telephone basic
menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Bluetooth telephones and press
W to confirm.
X Select the desired mobile phone in the
Bluetooth® telephones list.
Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select De-authorise and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to revoke authorisation for this
device.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the device will be deleted
from the Bluetooth® telephones list.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
i Before re-authorising the mobile phone,
you should also delete the device name MB
Bluetooth from your mobile phone's Bluetooth® list.
Telephone basic menu
interface)
(Bluetooth®
Press the % function button.
If the mobile phone is ready for use, the following display appears:
Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth® interface)
: Network provider's name (depends on the
connected phone)
; Signal strength of mobile phone network
Ä
Receiver icon ¢ or ¡
To display call lists
Character bar
Bluetooth® name of the currently connected mobile phone
To display the COMAND phone book
i Displays : and ; are shown, depending
on the mobile phone connected.
Bars ; display the current signal strength
of the mobile phone network. If all the bars
are filled, you have optimum reception. If
all the bars are empty, there is very poor
reception or none at all.
Receiver icon = shows whether a call is
active/being connected ¡ or not ¢.
SMS display in telephone basic menu
The SMS menu item is available if the Bluetooth® telephone supports the MAP Bluetooth® profile (Message Access Profile) and
the text message has been downloaded from
the Bluetooth® telephone. The menu item is
otherwise greyed out and is not available.
The 1 mail icon is displayed when you have
an unread text message. The symbol disappears once you have read the text message.
The ú mail symbol is displayed when the
Convenience telephony
119
text message memory is full. The symbol disappears once you delete at least one text
message.
You will find further information in the "Text
message" section (Y page 137).
Convenience telephony
Establishing a connection
For convenience telephony with COMAND,
you require a mobile phone bracket and a
suitable mobile phone.
i Some mobile phones are connected via
Bluetooth® to the mobile phone bracket. In
such cases, you can use convenience telephony (without the charging and antenna
functions) even when the mobile phone is
not in the bracket.
You can obtain more detailed information
about suitable mobile phones and about connecting convenience telephones to COMAND
from your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or
on the Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect.
X Insert the bracket into the fixture in the
armrest (see the vehicle Owner's Manual).
X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket
(see vehicle Owner's Manual).
Telephone
Connecting a mobile phone
Example
: To engage the mobile phone
; Connector contact
= Mobile phone bracket
Switch on the mobile phone (see the mobile
phone operating instructions).
i Some mobile phones can switch on automatically when inserted into the bracket.
If Bluetooth® interface telephony is active:
press the % function button.
X Select Telephone in the telephone basic
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Bluetooth telephones and press
W to confirm.
X Select Convenience phone and press W
to confirm.
You may be requested to enter the PIN via
COMAND.
PIN entry
i If you have entered an incorrect PIN twice
via COMAND, you will not see a warning to
inform you that you only have one more
attempt. If you enter the PIN incorrectly
three times, you must unlock the SIM card
via the mobile phone (see mobile phone
operating instructions).
You can enter the PIN in COMAND using the
character bar or the number keys.
If your vehicle is equipped with LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instrucZ
Convenience telephony
120
Telephone
tions), you can also enter the PIN using voice
commands.
When the mobile phone is inserted in the
bracket and is operational, the following display is shown:
: PIN entry line
; To confirm the pin (available if entered)
= Character bar
You can enter the PIN using the character bar
(option 1) or the number keypad (option 2).
X Option 1: select the digits in character bar
= by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
Select icon ; in character bar = and
press W to confirm or press the 6 button.
Further information on deleting can be found
in the "Searching for a phone book entry"
section (Y page 130).
X Option 2: enter the digits using the number
keys.
Once you have entered the first digit,
icon ; is highlighted in the character bar.
X Confirm symbol ; by pressing W the
COMAND controller or press the 6 button.
In both cases, COMAND will check the PIN.
If the PIN is entered correctly, the telephone basic menu appears.
Telephone basic menu (convenience
telephony)
Press the % function button.
Telephone basic menu (convenience telephony)
: Network provider icon
; Signal strength of mobile phone network
Ä
= Receiver icon ¢ or ¡
? To display call lists
A Character bar
B Convenience phone connected
7 To display the COMAND phone book
i Bars ; display the current signal
strength of the mobile phone network. If all
the bars are filled, you have optimum
reception. If all the bars are empty, there is
very poor reception or none at all.
Receiver icon = shows whether a call is
active/being connected ¡ or not ¢.
SMS display in telephone basic menu
The 1 mail icon is displayed when you have
an unread text message. The symbol disappears once you have read the text message.
The ú mail symbol is displayed when the
text message memory is full. The symbol disappears once you delete at least one text
message.
The SMS menu item is available if the function
is supported by the convenience telephone
and the mobile phone bracket and once the
convenience telephone has completed the
download of the text message.
Switching between Bluetooth® and convenience telephony
Rwhen
you switch from the convenience
telephone to phoning via the Bluetooth®
interface and the Bluetooth® telephone
does not support the MAP Bluetooth® profile
Rwhen COMAND first downloads the text
messages from the mobile phone after the
mobile phone has been inserted in the
bracket
The duration of the download, depends on the
number of text messages (SMS) stored on the
phone and the make of the phone.
Switching telephony type when
switching on
Note
COMAND starts the telephony type depending on whether:
Ra
Mercedes-Benz SAP module is inserted
into the fixture or not
Ra bracket is inserted for the mobile phone
or not.
If neither an SAP module nor a bracket are
inserted, COMAND immediately changes to
Bluetooth® telephony.
SAP module is inserted
Switching between Bluetooth® and
convenience telephony
Switching telephony type during
operation
If your vehicle is equipped with convenience
telephony, you can switch between telephony
types.
You can switch the telephony type in the Bluetooth® telephone list by selecting either a
Bluetooth® telephone or the convenience
telephone.
Call up the Bluetooth® telephones list
(Y page 115).
X Select a mobile phone by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
i SAP telephony: mobile phones which are
connected to the optionally available "Bluetooth® telephone module with SAP profile"
permanently installed telephone (SAP module), are displayed in their own telephone
list. These can be called up by selecting the
SAP telephones menu item, thereby
switching to SAP telephony. See the separate operating instructions.
COMAND starts SAP telephony.
i You must set up your SAP module before
first use so it is recognised by COMAND,
see the separate operating instructions.
If no mobile phone is connected to the SAP
module, the Ready for SAP connectiv‐
ity... message appears. Approximately two
minutes after switching on COMAND, a
prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to switch to Bluetooth® telephony.
If you confirm by selecting Yes, the Ready
for Bluetooth telephony... message
will appear. COMAND will search for the two
mobile phones last connected via the Bluetooth® interface. If one of the two mobile
phones is found, the telephone basic menu
for Bluetooth® telephony (Y page 118)
appears. If neither of the mobile phones are
found, the Ready for Bluetooth teleph‐
ony... message remains in the display. You
now have to connect your mobile phone
(Y page 114).
After confirming No, the message Ready
for SAP connectivity... reappears.
SAP module is not inserted
If there is no Mercedes-Benz SAP module fitted, COMAND checks whether a bracket is
inserted.
Telephone
The menu item is greyed out and is not available:
121
122
Reception and transmission volume
Telephone
Bracket for the mobile phone is inserted
COMAND starts convenience telephony.
If no mobile phone is in the bracket the following message appears: Phone not inser‐
ted. Approximately two minutes after you
switch on COMAND, you are asked if you
want to switch to Bluetooth® telephony.
If you confirm by selecting Yes, the Ready
for Bluetooth telephony... message
will appear. COMAND will search for the two
mobile phones last connected via the Bluetooth® interface. If one of the two mobile
phones is found, the telephone basic menu
for Bluetooth® telephony (Y page 118)
appears. If neither of the mobile phones are
found, the Ready for Bluetooth teleph‐
ony... message remains in the display. You
now have to connect your mobile phone
(Y page 114).
After confirming No, the message No tele‐
phone inserted reappears.
If there is a mobile phone in the bracket, the
PIN query (Y page 119) or the telephone basic
menu for convenience telephony
(Y page 120) appears.
Mobile phone bracket is not inserted
COMAND starts telephony via the Bluetooth® interface and searches for the last two
mobile phones to have been connected via
the Bluetooth® interface. If one of the two
mobile phones is found, the telephone basic
menu for Bluetooth® telephony
(Y page 118) appears. If neither of the mobile
phones are found, the Ready for Blue‐
tooth telephony... message remains in
the display. You now have to connect your
mobile phone (Y page 114).
Reception and transmission volume
The following information is valid for Bluetooth® interface telephony and convenience
telephony.
Once the mobile phone has been authorised,
you can optimise the transmission and reception volume settings. To find out about the
best possible settings for your mobile phone,
contact a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or
visit http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
connect.
i Incorrect settings may have a significant
impact on the quality of calls.
Press the % function button.
Select Telephone in the telephone basic
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Bluetooth telephones and press
W to confirm.
X Select an authorised mobile phone from
the list by turning cVd.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Reception volume or Transmis‐
sion volume and press W to confirm.
i The Bluetooth® connection with the
mobile phone remains active until the next
time COMAND is switched off unless you
connect a different mobile phone via the
phone list. While the Bluetooth® connection is active, only the Bluetooth® interface
functions are available to you.
: Scale with indicator showing current vol-
ume
Telephone operation
123
Select a volume setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X To close the setting scale: press W or
slide XVY.
Telephone operation
Rejecting or accepting a call
When there is an incoming call, you see a corresponding window in the display.
To reject: select Reject by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Multifunction display (example)
i You can also accept the call by voice command using LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions).
Once you have accepted the call, you can use
hands-free mode. The call volume can be
adjusted (Y page 31). For more information,
see the "Functions during a single call connection" section (Y page 125).
The display shows the phone number or the
name and phone number (if the entry is stored
in the address book) or shows the Unknown
(phone number withheld) message.
i You can also accept a call as described
above when another main function is
switched on in COMAND. Once you have
accepted the call, the display switches to
telephone mode. After the call is finished,
you see the display of the previous main
application again.
The display does not switch to telephone
mode if you:
or
Press the ~ button on COMAND or the
multifunction steering wheel.
To accept: confirm Accept by pressing
W.
or
Rhide
the window with the % button
next to the COMAND controller and then
Raccept the call with the ; button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
Press the 6 button on COMAND or the
multifunction steering wheel.
Making a call
Entering a telephone number using the
number keypad
Call up the telephone basic menu:
Telephone
Incoming call
Telephone operation
124
telephony (Y page 120)
via the Bluetooth® interface
(Y page 118)
Rconvenience
Rtelephony
Enter the digits using the number keypad.
To connect the call: press the 6 button on COMAND.
or
Telephone
Press the =; buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to select the Tel
menu and press the 6 button.
Entering a telephone number using the
telephone basic menu
Call up the telephone basic menu:
Rconvenience telephony (Y page 120)
Rtelephony via the Bluetooth® interface
(Y page 118)
Select the digits one by one by turning
cVd and sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
To connect a call: select ° in the character bar and press W to confirm.
To select a call: turn cVd the COMAND
controller.
X To connect the call: press W the
COMAND controller.
Using the multifunction steering wheel
Press the =; buttons to select the
Tel menu.
X Press the ; button to open the list of
dialled numbers.
X Press the :9 buttons to select the
desired name or phone number.
X To connect a call: press 6 or 9 on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Connecting a call to an entry on a call
list or in the COMAND phone book
or
Call up the COMAND phone book and
select an entry (Y page 130).
To connect a call: press W the COMAND
controller or the 6 button.
or
Press the 6 button on COMAND or the
multifunction steering wheel.
Redialling a number
On COMAND
Call up the telephone basic menu:
Rconvenience telephony (Y page 120)
Rtelephony via the Bluetooth® interface
(Y page 118)
Select ° in the character bar and press
W to confirm.
or
If the telephone basic menu is displayed,
press the 6 button in COMAND.
In both cases, the calls dialled list appears.
The most recently dialled number is at the
top.
Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 134).
Connecting a call to a COMAND phone
book entry via the multifunction steering wheel
Use = or ; to select the Tel menu.
Press :, 9 or 9 to switch to the
phone book.
X Press : or 9 to select the name you
want.
i The saved names are displayed alphabetically.
i If you hold down the : or 9 button
for longer than one second, rapid scroll
begins. The multifunction display goes from
the 7th entry displayed to the first entry
under the following letter. Release the button to stop.
Telephone operation
To connect a call: press 6 or 9 on the
multifunction steering wheel.
The Connecting call..., message
appears in the multifunction display along
with the number being dialled and the
name, if it is stored in the phone book.
The number dialled is stored in the corresponding call list.
i If there are several numbers for this
name, you see a list of sub-entries..
X Press : or 9 to select the
phone number you want.
X Press the 6 or 9 button again to
place the call.
Functions available during a call
Overview
Telephone
Telephone operation with a single call
: Person you are calling
Making a call via speed dial
; Icon for active telephone connection
Phone book entries are saved in the speed
dial list (Y page 136).
Option 1:
= To switch hands-free microphone on/off
Hold down one of the number keys for longer than two seconds.
Option 2:
Call up the telephone basic menu:
Rconvenience telephony (Y page 120)
Rtelephony via the Bluetooth® interface
(Y page 118)
X Select Speed dial preset list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears.
X Select the storage location and press W to
confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, the telephone basic menu appears and displays
the selected entry. This initiates dialling.
125
? To send DTMF tones (not possible with all
mobile phones)
A To end a call
Switching the hands-free microphone
on/off
This function is also available during an active
phone call.
X Call up the telephone basic menu:
Rconvenience telephony (Y page 120)
Rtelephony via the Bluetooth® interface
(Y page 118)
To switch off: select Mike off and press
W to confirm.
If the microphone is switched off, the display shows the Q icon and the The
microphone is off message appears for
a short period.
X To switch on: select Mike on and press
W to confirm.
The Q symbol disappears. You will briefly
see the The microphone is on message.
Telephone operation
126
Ending an active call
Select ¢ in the telephone basic menu and
press W to confirm.
or
Telephone
Press the ~ button on COMAND or the
multifunction steering wheel.
The call on hold is activated.
Valid for both options: if you accept the
waiting call using the mobile phone, the active
call is put on hold. You then have two calls.
The call you have just accepted is active.
The COMAND display changes. If you continue to operate functions on the mobile
phone, the COMAND display may differ from
that of the mobile phone.
Rejecting or accepting a waiting call
Making a further call
Overview
The Call waiting function must be supported
by the mobile phone network provider and be
enabled. Depending on the mobile phone
used, the system behaviour differs when
accepting a call (option 1 and 2).
If you have a call in progress and receive
another call, a new window appears in the
display. You also hear a tone. You can accept
or reject the call.
X To reject: select Reject and press W to
confirm.
or
X Press the ~ button on COMAND or the
multifunction steering wheel.
X To accept: select Accept and press W to
confirm.
or
X Press the 6 button on COMAND or the
multifunction steering wheel.
Option 1: if you accept the waiting call, the
active call is ended.
The active call will also be ended if you
accept the waiting call using LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating
instructions).
Option 2: if you accept the waiting call, the
active call is put on hold. You can then
switch back and forth between both calls
(toggling), (Y page 126).
You can make a second call while on the
phone with someone else. This action puts
the previous call on hold. The function is available if your mobile phone supports this function via Bluetooth®.
i The second option is available if your
mobile phone supports the toggling function (via Bluetooth®).
: Symbol for making a second call
Select the symbol : by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
or
Press the ; button on COMAND.
Enter the phone number:
Rmanually (Y page 123)
Rusing the phone book (Y page 128)
Rfrom the call lists (Y page 134)
Rusing speed dial (Y page 125)
Call waiting
Overview
You can switch back and forth between calls
with this function. The function is available if
Telephone operation
Switching between the active call and the
call on hold
Sending DTMF tones
This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Answering machines or other devices can be
controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote
query functions.
X If you would like to listen to the messages
on your answering machine, for example,
select the corresponding number.
To transmit individual characters: once
a connection has been established to the
answer phone, select the desired characters in the character bar and press W to
confirm.
or
: Active call
; Call on hold
Confirm symbol ; by pressing W.
or
Press the ; button on COMAND or the
multifunction steering wheel.
The previous call on hold is activated.
Ending an active call
X Select ¢ in the telephone basic menu and
press W to confirm.
or
X Press the ~ button on COMAND or the
multifunction steering wheel.
The call on hold is activated.
Press the corresponding key on the
COMAND number keypad.
Every character selected will be transmitted immediately.
X To send a phone book entry as a DTMF
sequence: select Name by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select the desired phone book entry and
press W to confirm.
The entry is sent as a DTMF character
string.
Conference call
You can interconnect calls (active and on
hold) on the mobile phone. This permits several parties to hear one another and speak
with one another.
You can also make a further call in COMAND
(Y page 126).
To return to the call display: select
Back and press W to confirm.
i You can also send DTMF tones using LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating
instructions).
Telephone
your mobile phone supports the toggling
function (via Bluetooth®).
You can use the function if you are answering
a second call or making a second call.
127
Using the phone book
128
Transferring a call (convenience telephony)
Telephone
Note
When using a bracket connected to the
mobile phone via Bluetooth®: if you wish to
continue a call in private mode, you will need
to perform the necessary steps on the mobile
phone (see the mobile phone operating
instructions).
From the hands-free system to the
mobile phone
Remove the mobile phone from the bracket
and, if necessary, switch the mobile phone
to "Private mode" (see the mobile phone
operating instructions).
The Telephone not inserted message
appears in the COMAND display. Subsequent operation is only possible using the
mobile phone.
From the mobile phone to the handsfree system
Insert the mobile phone into the bracket.
Once the call has been transferred to
hands-free mode, all the functions described in the section "Functions during a single call connection" will be available to you
(Y page 125).
Using the phone book
Introduction
The phone book displays the names and
phone numbers of all of the address book
entries saved in the COMAND address book.
If an address book entry does not have a telephone number, it does not appear in the
phone book.
In addition, MB Contact is listed as the first
entry. This allows you to place a call to the
Mercedes-Benz Service hotline
(Y page 147).
You can store telephone numbers in the
phone book or import contacts. The phone
book of the mobile phone is automatically
downloaded to COMAND after connection.
You can import contacts from the memory
card and the USB device into the phone book,
or receive vCards via Bluetooth®.
The functions:
Rimporting
contacts
vCards
Rdeleting contacts
are described in detail in the "Address
book" section (Y page 145).
Rreceiving
i The stored phone book and the vCards
remain in COMAND, even if you use
COMAND with another mobile phone. The
entries can be viewed without a mobile
phone. For this reason, delete the phone
book before selling or transferring ownership of your vehicle.
Calling up the phone book
Overview
Select Name in the telephone basic menu
by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
If the phone book contains entries, they will
be displayed in alphabetical order. The
character bar at the bottom of the display
is active.
The character bar is used for fast selection
of an entry.
X
To close the phone book: select & in
the character bar by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
129
Telephone
Using the phone book
Press the % button.
Using the phone book
130
Symbol overview
Icon
Explanation
Æ
Address book entry that has been entered or changed via COMAND
Imported contact that has been saved in the phone or address book
Address book entry with voice tag
i These entries have also been assigned a voice tag. Voice tags are available
Telephone
in vehicles with LINGUATRONIC (see the separate operating instructions).
Ã
Contact imported from a mobile phone that supports PBAP or imported from
a convenience telephone
¯
Entry which has been imported from the SD memory card or USB device
®
Entry imported via the Bluetooth® interface
Using the multifunction steering wheel
Use = or ; to select the Tel menu.
Use 9 or : or 9 to call up the phone
book.
Searching for a phone book entry
With character bar
You determine the first letter of the entry you
are looking for with the first character you
enter.
Select a character by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The first entry in the list that starts with the
letter selected is highlighted. If there are
similar entries, the next different character
is shown. For example, with entries such as
Christel and Christine, the beginnings
of the names are similar. In this case you
will be offered a choice between E and I.
Select the characters of the entry you are
searching for one by one and press W to
confirm.
When the selection is clear, COMAND
switches automatically to the selection list.
X To complete the search: switch from the
phone book with character bar to the selection list (Y page 131).
The last list entry is automatically highlighted.
With number keypad
Alternatively, you can also enter digits using
the number keypad (direct entry)
(Y page 26).
Deleting characters
To delete individual characters: select
F by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W briefly.
or
Briefly press the j button
Each time a character is deleted, the entry
most closely resembling the remaining
characters is shown at the top of the list.
X To delete the entry: select F by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
Using the phone book
131
and hold W until the entire entry has been
deleted.
or
Press and hold the j button until the
entire entry is deleted.
Select B and press W.
Select the desired language.
Changing the character set of the character bar
Select p and press W to confirm.
The character set changes each time you
make this selection.
Selecting an entry directly from the list
You can switch to the list at any time during
character entry.
X Slide VZ the COMAND controller repeatedly or press and hold W until the character bar disappears.
or
X Select ¬ and press W to confirm.
To select an entry: turn cVd the
COMAND controller until the desired entry
is highlighted and press W to confirm.
To select a phone number: the G icon indicates that an entry contains more than one
phone number.
Select a phone book entry with the G icon
and press W to confirm.
The sub-entries appear. The G icon
changes to I.
Phone book entry with several entries
Select a sub-entry by turning cVd and
press W to confirm.
To return to the phone book with character bar: select Back in the list and press
W to confirm.
or
Press the % back button.
Selecting an entry using the multifunction steering wheel
Use = or ; to select the Tel menu.
Use 9 or : or 9 to call up the phone
book.
X Press and hold the 9 or : button
until the desired entry is highlighted.
i If you press the 9 or : button for
longer than a second, the on-board computer shows the names in rapid scroll. After
a short time, rapid scroll speeds up. It stops
when you release the button again or the
end of the list is reached.
If an entry has several phone numbers,
these are displayed.
Select a phone book entry and press the
9 or 6 button.
The sub-entries appear.
X Select the desired sub-entry with the
9 or : button.
To make a call: press the 9 or 6 button.
Telephone
Changing the language of the character
bar
Using the phone book
132
Displaying details for an entry
Telephone
Select an entry in the selection list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Details and press W to confirm.
The detailed display appears.
To close the detailed view: slide XVY
repeatedly until the entry is highlighted
again or press the % back button.
Select the list symbol on the right in the
selection list by sliding VY the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select New entry and press W to confirm.
Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and press W to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
Deleting an entry from the phone
book
If the entry contains only phone numbers, it
is deleted from the phone book and address
book.
If there is additional data included along with
the phone number, e.g. a navigable destination, the entry is deleted from the phone book
but retained in the address book.
X Select an entry in the selection list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether the entry
should be deleted.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry is deleted in
accordance with the rules described above.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Creating a new entry in the phone
book
Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly in the phone book until the selection
list appears.
Select Continue and press W to confirm.
The input menu with data fields appears.
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
Enter characters and save the entry. Proceed as described under "Entering characters" in the "Entering characters in the
address and phone books" section
(Y page 27).
i The entry is created in the phone book
and in the address book.
Using call lists
Select an entry in the selection list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Add telephone no. and press W
to confirm.
X Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and press W to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
X Select Continue and press W to confirm.
COMAND stores the data if there are fewer
than five numbers assigned to the entry you
are searching for in the selected number
category.
If five numbers are stored for the entry in
the selected number category, a prompt
will appear asking whether you wish to
overwrite one of the existing numbers.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, a selection list will appear
containing the five existing numbers.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
X Select the number to be overwritten by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
An input menu appears. The data field for
entering the new phone number is highlighted.
Enter characters and save the entry. Proceed as described under "Entering characters" in the "Entering characters in the
address and phone books" section
(Y page 27).
phone operation. Call lists are not available
unless a mobile is connected to COMAND.
COMAND supports the PBAP Bluetooth® profile. For this reason, note that the system
behaviour differs, especially when telephoning via the Bluetooth® interface:
RConvenience telephone or Bluetooth® tele-
phone with PBAP Bluetooth® profile:
The call lists are downloaded automatically
from the mobile phone by COMAND as
soon as the mobile phone is connected to
COMAND.
COMAND displays entries without time
information if they have been downloaded
from a convenience telephone.
RBluetooth® telephone without PBAP Bluetooth® profile:
The call lists are created and displayed by
COMAND.
i For Bluetooth® telephones without the
Bluetooth® profile PBAP, the call lists in
COMAND are not synchronised with those
on your mobile phone. These calls may or
may not be listed on your mobile phone,
depending on the model.
i If no mobile phone is connected, then the
Call lists menu item is greyed out and
cannot be selected. If you connect a mobile
phone other than the previous one to
COMAND, the previously available call lists
and their entries will be deleted automatically. They are still available on the mobile
phone itself.
i The respective menu item can only be
selected if calls have already been made or
received in COMAND.
Displaying missed calls in the COMAND
display is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Using call lists
Introduction
COMAND displays lists of calls received
(including missed calls) and made during
Telephone
Adding telephone numbers to an
existing phone book entry
133
Using call lists
134
Opening the call list and selecting an
entry
Telephone
Press the % function button.
Select Call lists in the telephone basic
menu by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Select Incoming calls or Calls dial‐
led using cVd and press W to confirm.
The corresponding list appears.
Select a list entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The detailed display appears.
X To go back to the list: slide XVY repeatedly until the list is highlighted.
Storing a phone number which has
not yet been stored
Introduction
For incoming calls from a person who is not
in the address book, COMAND displays the
phone number in the call list. You can save
this entry.
Storing as a new entry in the address
book
assigned) and phone number of the selected entry
= To call up options
Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 134).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
i You can also call up the list of dialled calls
i Save is shown in grey if the selected list
List of selected phone numbers (example)
: To close the list
; Date/time (if available), symbol (if
by pressing the 6 button when the telephone basic menu is shown. In this case,
the list will only show phone numbers.
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller.
X To dial a phone number: press W.
To close the list: select Back and press
W to confirm or press the % button.
Displaying details about a list entry
COMAND can also show a shortened list entry
in full.
entry has already been saved in the address
book.
Select New entry and press W to confirm.
Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and press W to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
Using call lists
Display (phone
book and address
book)
Not classified
No symbol
Home
¸
Work
·
Phone category
Display (phone
book and address
book)
Not classified
Landline
¬
Mobile
Ï
Car
´
Select Save and press W to confirm.
An input menu with data fields is shown.
The data field for the telephone number is
filled in automatically.
Adding a phone number to an address
book entry
Open a call list and select an entry
(Y page 134).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
i Save is shown in grey if the selected list
entry has already been saved.
Select Add telephone no. and press W
to confirm.
Select a category for the number, e.g.
Home, and press W to confirm.
X Select a category for the phone, e.g.
Mobile, and press W to confirm.
X Select Save.
The search menu for address book entries
appears.
X Search for the desired entry. Proceed as
described under "Searching for a phone
book entry" (Y page 130).
: Data field with cursor
; Telephone number and symbol for the
phone category are automatically entered
= Character bar
Proceed as described under "Entering characters" in the "Entering characters in the
address and phone books" section
(Y page 27).
Press W when you have finished searching.
COMAND stores the data if there are fewer
than five numbers assigned to the entry you
are searching for in the selected number
category.
You will see a message to this effect.
If five numbers are stored for the entry you
are searching for, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to overwrite one of
the existing numbers.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, a selection list with the
five existing numbers is displayed.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
X Select the number to be overwritten in the
list by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
COMAND overwrites the selected number
with the new data.
Telephone
Number category
135
Using the speed-dial list
136
Telephone
Deleting call lists
This function is available when COMAND creates and manages the call lists. This is the
case if you use a Bluetooth® telephone without the support of the Bluetooth® profile
PBAP or use a convenience telephone.
If you use call lists from a Bluetooth® telephone with the support of the Bluetooth® profile PBAP or a convenience telephone, you
cannot delete them from COMAND.
Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Speed dial by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
i If you delete the call lists from the mobile
phone (separate mobile phone operating
instructions), COMAND updates the call list
display the next time it connects. The call
lists are empty in the case described.
Select Call lists in the telephone basic
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Delete call lists and press W
to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete all call lists.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the call lists are deleted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Speed dial menu
Confirm Assign speed dial preset by
pressing W.
The speed dial list appears. The selected
phone book entry is listed as the first entry.
The next available speed dial preset is highlighted.
Select the speed dial preset by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The phone book entry is saved in the speed
dial preset.
Using the speed-dial list
Storing a phone book entry in the
speed dial list
You can assign ten speed dial presets (0 - 9)
to the speed dial list. There are two options
available for this purpose.
Option 1:
Search for a phone book entry in the phone
book (Y page 130).
X If an entry has several phone numbers,
select the desired number by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
Option 2
Call up the telephone basic menu:
Text message (SMS)
Rtelephony
Making a call via speed dial
A description can be found in the "Making a
call" section (Y page 125).
Deleting a speed dial number
To delete a speed dial number: select
Delete speed dial preset in the
"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The speed dial number is deleted.
To delete all speed dial numbers: select
Delete all speed dial presets in the
"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You will be asked whether you want to continue.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, all speed dial numbers will
be deleted from the speed dial list.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Text message (SMS)
Information and requirements
The following conditions must be fulfilled in
order to use the functions:
Type of telephony
Conditions
Bluetooth®
interface telephony
RThe
Convenience
telephony
RThe
Bluetooth® mobile
phone supports the
MAP Bluetooth® profile
(Message Access
Profile)
mobile phone is
inserted in the bracket
and switched on.
RThe PIN has been
entered.
RThe mobile phone is logged into a mobile phone
network.
i Telephony via the SAP module, see the
separate operating instructions.
When the mobile phone is connected, the 30
most recent text messages which are currently stored on the phone are loaded to the
COMAND's text message inbox and displayed.
i COMAND may not load all the most
recent text messages:
This may occur in exceptional cases, for
example when using certain mobile
phones/brackets and when the mobile
phone inbox holds many text messages.
If the above conditions are met, new incoming
text messages appear in the COMAND text
message inbox. In addition, a tone sounds
and the / icon appears. The symbol disappears once you have read the text message. The ú mail symbol is displayed when
the text message memory is full. The symbol
disappears once you delete at least one text
message.
Telephone
telephony (Y page 120)
via the Bluetooth® interface
(Y page 118)
X Select Call lists by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Speed dial preset list and
press W to confirm.
The speed dial list appears.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Confirm Assign speed dial preset by
pressing W.
X Proceed as described under option 1.
Rconvenience
137
Text message (SMS)
138
Displaying the text message (SMS)
inbox
Overview
Press the % function button.
Select SMS in the telephone basic menu by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The text message inbox appears.
Telephone
Listening to a text message
You can set the language (Y page 47) and the
speed of the read-aloud function
(Y page 44).
X Press W while a text message is being displayed, select Read aloud and press W to
confirm.
COMAND reads out the text message.
To cancel the read-aloud function: press
the 8 button.
or
Press W, select Cancel read-aloud
function and press W to confirm.
Switching the display
Text message (SMS) inbox
The shortened text or sender of the selected
text message (depending on the settings) as
well as the date and time at which the selected text message was received are displayed
at the top and in the middle. The 0 symbol
appears if a text message has not yet been
read.
Reading a text message (SMS)
Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The text message appears.
X To scroll through the display or select
phone numbers in a text message: turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
The display scrolls up or down line by line,
or skips to the next or previous telephone
number and automatically highlights it.
X To return to the list: press W and select
Back.
You can switch between displaying the text
message sender or the text message content.
The sender display shows the sender of the
text message. If the sender is stored in the
COMAND phone book, the name is displayed.
The text display shows the first few words of
a text message.
X Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X To switch to the text display: select the
list symbol to the right of the text message
by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Display text and press W to confirm.
The view changes.
X To switch to the sender display: select
the list symbol to the right of the text message by sliding VY the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X Select Display sender and press W to
confirm.
The view changes.
Text message (SMS)
139
COMAND can also show a shortened sender
display in full.
X Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the text
message by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The detailed display appears.
X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the
COMAND controller.
Returning to the telephone basic menu
Press the % back button.
Managing text messages
Calling a text message (SMS) sender
Press W the COMAND controller while the
text message is being displayed.
X Select Call sender and press W to confirm.
The telephone makes the call to the sender.
Using phone numbers in the text
You can use numbers that are red and underlined in text messages (SMS).
i It is possible that a highlighted numerical
sequence may not contain a telephone
number.
Select a usable number when the text message is displayed.
Telephone
Displaying details and phone numbers
: Usable numerical sequence
Press W the COMAND controller and
select Use.
X Select Call.
The telephone makes the call.
i You can use the "New entry" or "Add no."
functions to save this telephone number or
to add it to an existing entry.
Storing the sender as a new address
book entry
This function is not possible if the sender’s
telephone number is already stored in the
address book.
X Press W the COMAND controller while the
text message is being displayed.
X Select Save number and press W to confirm.
X Select New entry and press W to confirm.
X Proceed as described in the "Storing as a
new entry in the address book" section
(Y page 134).
Storing a text message sender in an
existing address book entry
Press W the COMAND controller while the
text message is being displayed.
X Select Save number and press W to confirm.
Using the address book
140
Select Add telephone no. and press W
to confirm.
X Proceed from the step "Select a number
category" in the "Adding telephone numbers to an existing phone book entry" section (Y page 133).
Deleting a text message (SMS)
Telephone
Select a text message in the text message
inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the text
message by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A deletion prompt appears.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the text message is
deleted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Calling up the address book
Option 1:
Press the % function button.
You see the telephone basic menu or the
address book if it was open previously.
X When the telephone basic menu is displayed, press the % function button
again.
Option 2:
With the telephone basic menu shown,
select Tel by sliding VZ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Address book from the menu and
press W to confirm.
i This delete function is not supported by
all mobile phones. The Delete failed
message appears.
Using the address book
Introduction
The address book organises and stores
entries which are entered from different sources (mobile phone, memory card, USB device,
COMAND telephone book, navigation system).
You can use these entries to make telephone
calls and for navigation.
i Address book entries remain stored when
the mobile phone is disconnected. Therefore, you should delete your personal data
using the reset function before selling your
vehicle, for example (Y page 48).
Address book with address book entry ¥ and navigable data ¤
i An address book entry can contain the
following information: surname, first name,
company, two addresses, geo-coordinates
and up to five telephone numbers.
To browse in the address book: turn
cVd the COMAND controller.
To close the address book: press the
% button.
Using the address book
Call up the address book (Y page 140).
Select Search in the address book by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If there are more than eight entries, the
search menu and the character bar appear.
Select New in the address book by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
An input menu with data fields appears.
Telephone
Searching for an address book entry
Input menu with data fields
: Selected data field with cursor
; Character bar
Search menu with character bar
: ¥ symbol for address book entry
; ¤ symbol for complete address data
from the navigation
= Character bar
? d symbol for phone book entry from the
mobile phone
A Entry with voice tag
Additional icons are described in the "Symbol
overview" section (Y page 130).
X Proceed as described under "Searching for
a phone book entry" (Y page 130).
Creating a new entry in the address
book
You can enter address data directly into the
address book. If you store telephone numbers in the COMAND phone book, these are
also saved in the address book. If you store a
navigation destination, COMAND creates an
address book entry which includes the complete navigable address data.
X Call up the address book (Y page 140).
Enter characters and save the entry. Proceed as described under "Entering characters" in the "Entering characters in the
address and phone books" section
(Y page 27).
Deleting an address book entry
Option 1: select Delete by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Option 2: search for an address book entry
(Y page 141).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, a prompt
will appear.
141
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the entry will be deleted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Using the address book
142
Displaying details for an address book
entry
Selecting an entry
Search for an address book entry and turn
cVd the COMAND controller to select it in
the selection list (Y page 141).
or
Telephone
Select an address book entry by browsing
(Y page 140).
X In both cases, press W.
The detailed display appears.
Showing the details of an address book
entry
Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The display is shown in full.
To close the detailed display: press the
% button.
Changing an address book entry
Changing an entry
Option 1: search for an address book entry
and turn cVd the COMAND controller to
select it in the selection list (Y page 141).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Edit and press W to confirm.
Detailed display for business details
: To go back to the previous menu
; \ icon for business details
= To call up options
Starting route guidance to an address
Select the address data field by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The route to the destination address is calculated and route guidance starts
(Y page 56).
Calling a telephone number
Select the phone number data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
This initiates dialling and you can then
make your call (Y page 125).
Option 2: call up the detailed view for an
address book entry (Y page 142).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Edit and press W to confirm.
Irrespective of the option, the input menu
containing data fields appears.
Proceed as described under "Entering characters" in the "Entering characters in the
address and phone books" section
(Y page 27).
Using the address book
Display the detailed view for an address
book entry (Y page 142) and highlight the
telephone number data field.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Change category and press W to
confirm.
X Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile.
X If desired, select Preferred and press W
to confirm.
Depending on the previous state, switch
the option on O or off ª. The phone number is displayed as the first number in the
phone book and can be dialled immediately.
X Select Save and press W to confirm.
The new category is stored.
Calling a number stored in an entry
Conditions
The mobile phone must be inserted in the
bracket or be connected via the Bluetooth®
interface.
Option 1
Displaying details for an address book
entry (Y page 142).
X Select the phone number data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The telephone makes the call. The display
switches to telephone mode.
Option 2
Displaying details for an address book
entry
X Select the phone number data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
data field by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Call and press W to confirm.
The telephone makes the call.
Storing the phone number as a speed
dial number
Displaying details for an address book
entry
X Select the phone number data field by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
data field by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Speed dial and press W to confirm.
You can now store the number in one of the
ten speed dial presets.
Starting route guidance to an entry
Note
This function is available as soon as you have
stored a destination in the destination memory (Y page 93). COMAND also saves destinations in the address book together with all
the data required for route guidance.
Telephone
Changing the category of a telephone
number data field
143
Using the address book
144
Option 1
Telephone
Search for an address book entry
(Y page 141) with the L icon and select it
from the list.
X Displaying details for an address book
entry (Y page 142).
X Select the address data field by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Option 2
Search for an address book entry
(Y page 141) with the L icon and select it
from the list.
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Navigate and press W to confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, route
guidance starts.
Option 3
Route guidance can also be started for an
address book entry without the ¤ symbol. If
the address data or designations do not
match the digital map, COMAND prompts you
to re-enter the address.
i It is best to then store the new address
under the address book entry. This will provide you with an address book entry that is
suitable for navigation.
Enter the destination address (Y page 53).
Select Save from the address entry menu
and press W to confirm.
X Assigning a destination to an address book
entry (Y page 94).
Voice tags
Adding or changing a voice tag
You can enter voice tags via LINGUATRONIC
(see the separate operating instructions).
Once you have assigned a voice tag to an
address book entry, you can vocally call up
this entry and dial a phone number, for example. You can add one voice tag per address
book entry.
X Search for an address book entry with or
without a voice tag (¦ symbol)
(Y page 141).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Voice tag and press W to confirm.
X Select Add or Change and press W to confirm.
Subsequent operation is voice-controlled.
LINGUATRONIC guides you through the
dialogues.
Deleting a voice tag
Search for an address book entry with a
voice tag (Y page 141).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Voice tag and press W to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A deletion prompt appears.
X Select Yes or No and press the 9 button
to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the
voice tag.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Using the address book
Search for an address book entry with a
voice tag (Y page 141).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Voice tag and press W to confirm.
X Select Listen and press W to confirm.
You hear the voice tag.
Storing a phone book entry from the
mobile phone in the address book
You can use this function to store phone book
entries:
Rimported
from a mobile phone
the memory card
Rfrom the USB device
Rvia the Bluetooth® interface
in the address book. These entries are indicated in the phone book by the different symbols (Y page 130).
X Search for an entry in the phone book on
the mobile phone d (Y page 130).
X Select the list symbol to the right of the
entry by sliding VY the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Save entry and press W to confirm.
The Saving procedure successful
message appears. The phone book entry is
now saved as an address book entry.
The d icon is replaced by the ¥ icon.
Rfrom
Importing contacts
Information and requirements
You can import contacts (vCards) from the
memory card and a USB device into the
address book, or receive vCards via Bluetooth®.
Depending on the source of the contact data,
different requirements apply:
Source
Conditions
Memory card The SD memory card must
be inserted (Y page 196)
and must contain importable contact data.
USB device
The USB device is inserted
in the USB port and contains importable contact
data.
Requirements for receiving vCards via
Bluetooth®
You can receive vCards from devices (e.g.
from a PC) which support the sending of
vCards via Bluetooth®.
It is not necessary to authorise the device in
COMAND to do so.
Please bear the following in mind:
RBluetooth® is activated in COMAND and on
the Bluetooth® device (see operating
instructions for the device).
Rthe Bluetooth® device can send vCards via
Bluetooth® (see operating instructions for
the device).
Rthe Bluetooth® device in the vehicle must
be switched on.
Importing from the memory card or USB
device
Entries imported from the memory card or
from a USB device have the ¯ symbol.
The following conditions must be fulfilled in
order to import vCards:
RvCards (vcf files) may be located in the main
directory or in folders. COMAND allows for
a targeted selection of the corresponding
directories.
RvCards must have the file extension ".vcf".
i A vCard can also contain several vCards.
Telephone
Listening to a voice tag
145
Using the address book
146
Telephone
COMAND supports vCards in versions 2.1
and 3.0.
Select Address book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Select Import contacts and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
Select From the memory card or From
the USB device in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
ing cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Import contacts and press W to
confirm.
X Select Received business cards in the
menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
This interrupts the Bluetooth® connection
between COMAND and your active mobile
phone. COMAND is, however, ready to
receive vCards from another Bluetooth®
device (PC, mobile phone).
Start the data transfer on the external Bluetooth® device (see the operating instructions for the device).
The number of vCards received is displayed.
To end reception: press W or the %
back button.
COMAND then reconnects with the mobile
phone. The new contacts are contained in
the address book with the BT addendum.
Select Add or Overwrite and press W to
confirm.
Add imports the entries from the memory
card or USB device into the address book.
Overwrite imports the entries from the
memory card or USB device and overwrites
all entries in the address book with the
¯ symbols. The previous entries are
then no longer available.
After the contact data has been imported
successfully, you will see a message to this
effect. The address book or the respective
telephone basic menu is displayed.
i You can select the Overwrite menu item
if the address book already contains corresponding entries. A message notifies you
when the address book is full.
Receiving vCards via Bluetooth®
Received vCards are identified by the ®
symbol.
Deleting contacts
i If you switch to another main function,
e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the
reception of vCards will be terminated.
Select Address book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turn-
Select Address book in the address book
or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,
select Telephone by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select Delete contacts and press W to
confirm.
Mercedes-Benz Contact
Select one of the following options:
RInternal contacts
RContacts from storage media
RReceived business cards
RDelete all
A prompt corresponding to your selection
appears.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the contacts are deleted
according to your selection.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
i Currently (as of June 2010), this service is
available in the following European countries:
RBelgium
RGermany
RFrance
RUnited
Kingdom
RIreland
RItaly
Telephone
RLuxembourg
RNetherlands
RAustria
RPoland
Mercedes-Benz Contact
RSwitzerland
Introduction
Mercedes-Benz Contact is ready to help at
any time, e.g. if you have queries about your
vehicle or if you need help in the event of a
breakdown.
This function enables you to call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre, subject to
a fee. All important vehicle data is sent at the
same time so that you receive optimum support.
The following data is transmitted:
Rthe
vehicle identification number
total distance recorder reading
Rthe vehicle position
Rthe telephone number
You can make use of the function with an
operational mobile phone connected to
COMAND via the Bluetooth® interface or convenience telephony.
Rthe
i Please note that Mercedes-Benz Contact
is a Mercedes-Benz customer service. In
emergencies, always call the national
emergency services first, using the standard national emergency service telephone
numbers.
147
RSlovakia
RSpain
RCzech
Republic
RHungary
Placing a call to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre
Call up the COMAND phone book
(Y page 128)
The "MB Contact" entry is the first entry in
the COMAND phone book. The entry is
highlighted.
You have two different means by which to
contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre:
X Press W the COMAND controller.
or
X This initiates a call. When the call is connected, a voice message prompts you to
confirm the data transmission by entering
the stated number via the COMAND control
panel. After confirmation, COMAND sends
the required vehicle data.
i Alternatively, you can initiate a call using
the multifunction steering wheel (see the
vehicle Owner’s Manual).
Data transmission is shown in the display.
This may take a moment. You can then select
148
Mercedes-Benz Contact
Telephone
the desired service and are connected with a
specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre.
Your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can provide further information on Mercedes-Benz
Contact, the range of services offered and on
using the function.
149
150
150
151
158
159
163
167
169
174
COMAND Online and Internet
Vehicle equipment ............................
General notes ....................................
Setting access data ..........................
Establishing/ending a connection . .
Options ..............................................
Special destination search ..............
Downloading special destinations . .
Weather .............................................
Internet ..............................................
150
General notes
Vehicle equipment
i These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your vehicle at the time it was purchased. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features described.
COMAND Online and Internet
General notes
Conditions for using COMAND Online
and Internet access
COMAND Online and Internet access are only
available for telephony via the Bluetooth®
interface, not for convenience telephony.
In order to use the functions, the following
conditions are necessary:
Rthe
mobile phone supports the DUN Bluetooth® profile (Dial-Up Networking) and is
connected to COMAND via the Bluetooth® interface (Y page 114). The DUN
Bluetooth® profile enables the mobile
phone to establish a dial-up connection to
the Internet.
Ryou need a valid mobile service contract
with a data option, which is used to calculate the associated connection costs.
Rthe access data of the connected mobile
phone must be set in COMAND
(Y page 151).
i You can obtain more detailed information
about suitable mobile phones from your
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or on the
Internet (http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect).
i If you use incorrect access data, additional costs may be incurred. This happens
when you use details that are different from
the contract or details from another contract/data package.
Connection difficulties while the vehicle is in motion
The connection may be lost if:
Rthere
is insufficient GSM or UMTS network
coverage in certain areas.
Ryou move from one GSM or UMTS transmitter/receiver area (GSM/UMTS cell) into
another and no data channels are free.
Ryou use a SIM card which is not compatible
with the network available.
Ryou are using a mobile phone with "Twincard" and the mobile phone with the second SIM card is already logged into the network.
Function restrictions
You will not be able to use the mobile phone,
will no longer be able to use the mobile phone,
or you may have to wait before using it, in the
following situations:
Rwhen
the mobile phone is switched off
Rwhen the "Bluetooth®" function is switched
off in COMAND
Rwhen the "Bluetooth®" function is switched
off on the mobile phone if you are using
Bluetooth® interface telephony
Rif the mobile phone is not logged into a
mobile phone network
Rif neither the mobile phone network nor the
mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a
phone and an Internet connection.
Roaming
When you are driving your vehicle in a different country and using the COMAND Online
and Internet functions, you may incur additional costs (roaming fees). When you are in
a different country, your SIM card must be
enabled for data roaming. If your mobile
phone network provider does not have a data
roaming agreement with the roaming partner,
Setting access data
151
it may not be possible to establish an Internet
connection.
Setting access data
The Internet access data for your connected
mobile can be obtained from your mobile
phone network provider. The required setting
for the Internet access data in COMAND is
described below.
A selected/manually set mobile phone network provider applies for the connected
mobile phone.
Select Settings by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
When you connect the mobile phone to
COMAND for the first time (Y page 114),
there is no mobile phone network provider
preset. Provider: is followed by the entry
not selected.
If a mobile phone is already connected and
a mobile phone network provider has been
selected or manually set, their name
appears here.
Press W the COMAND controller.
The list of mobile phone network providers
appears.
i Additional costs may incur if the incorrect
access data (details that are different from
the contract or details from another contract/data package) is set.
i When you are driving your vehicle in a different country and using the COMAND
Online and Internet functions, additional
costs (roaming fees) may incur.
i While initialising the mobile phone for the
Internet connection, access data which is
already on the mobile phone may be overwritten. You should therefore check the
settings on the mobile phone (see the
mobile phone operating instructions).
i Adjust the access data settings when the
vehicle is stationary.
Selecting/setting Internet access
data
Calling up the list of mobile phone network providers
Select the globe icon in the main function
bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
COMAND Online and Internet
Introduction
Setting access data
152
COMAND Online and Internet
List of mobile phone network providers (empty)
You can now select predefined access data
of the mobile phone network provider
(option 1) or manually set the access data of
the mobile phone network provider (option 2).
i You must set the access data of the
mobile phone network provider who provides the SIM card or the associated data
package (access settings) for the connected mobile phone. The access data remains
the same when you are in a different country (roaming). The access data of another
network is not selected.
Option 1: selecting the access data of
the mobile phone network provider
i The access data of the mobile phone network provider is selected once for the connected mobile phone.
Select Search for providers in the
mobile phone network providers list
(Y page 152) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
A list of countries appears.
Select the country of your mobile phone
network provider, e.g. Germany, and press
W to confirm.
The list of available mobile phone network
providers appears.
There are mobile phone network providers
who supply various access data (e.g. depending on the data package used).
X The mobile phone network provider
only has one access setting: select the
mobile phone network provider by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears.
To check the preset access data before
connection, select Edit and press W to
confirm.
The list of access data appears.
Setting access data
Editing the access data
Proceed as described in "Making entries"
(Y page 155) in the "Manually setting the
access data of the mobile phone network
provider" section.
When you confirm the edited access data,
the list of mobile phone network providers
appears and displays the selected provider.
Access data is correct
Press the % back button or select &
and press W to confirm.
You can now accept the access data of the
mobile phone network provider.
X Confirm Save by pressing W.
The list of mobile phone network providers
appears, the access data of the provider
have been accepted.
The mobile phone network provider has
several access settings: if several access
settings are displayed after selecting the
mobile phone network provider, select the
appropriate access setting by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears.
access data of the mobile phone network
provider" section.
When you confirm the edited access data,
the list of mobile phone network providers
appears and displays the selected provider.
Access data is correct
Press the % back button or select &
and press W to confirm.
You can now accept the access data of the
mobile phone network provider.
X Confirm Save by pressing W.
The list of mobile phone network providers
appears, the access data of the provider
have been accepted.
List of mobile phone network providers with the
selected provider
The currently selected access settings (# dot
in front of the entry) are used for the connected mobile phone.
X To return to the carousel view: press the
% back button twice.
or
X Press W the COMAND controller and then
the % back button.
To check the preset access data settings
before connection, select Edit and press
W to confirm.
The list of access data appears.
Editing the access data
Proceed as described in "Making entries"
(Y page 155) in the "Manually setting the
Option 2: manually setting the access
data of the mobile phone network provider
Calling up the list of access data
i The access data of the mobile phone network provider is set once for the connected
mobile phone.
COMAND Online and Internet
153
Setting access data
154
COMAND Online and Internet
Input field
Meaning
Provider:
Name of the provider, to
be displayed in the list of
mobile phone network
providers. The name can
be selected at will.
The standard entry is pro‐
vider .
Ph. number:
Access number for establishing the connection.
Confirm New provider in the list of mobile
phone network providers by pressing W
the COMAND controller.
The list of access data appears. The standard name provider  is automatically
entered into the Provider: field. You can
now make the entries.
i The access number
depends on the mobile
phone used. For GSM/
UMTS mobile phones,
*99***1# is used as a
standard.
Access
point:
APN network access point
(Access Point Name)
You can obtain this information from your mobile
phone network provider.
i Entry is not necessary
for all mobile phone network providers/mobile
phones.
List of access data (new provider)
User ID:
The user identification can
be obtained from your
mobile phone network
provider.
i Entry is not necessary
for all mobile phone network providers.
Password:
The password can be
obtained from your mobile
phone network provider.
i Entry is not necessary
for all mobile phone network providers.
Setting access data
Input field
Meaning
DNS
address:
The DNS addresses
(Domain Name Service)
can be negotiated automatically or must be
entered manually. The
required information can
be obtained from your
mobile phone network
provider.
To enter the phone number: in the list of
access data (Y page 154), select the Ph.
number: input field by sliding ÆV or turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The input menu for the phone number
appears.
Enter the telephone number. Instructions
for entering characters using the controls
can be found in the "Operating COMAND"
section (Y page 27).
155
network providers support the Automatic
function. If you selected
the Manual option, you
are usually required to
enter a DNA address.
DNS 1:
DNS 2:
Fields for entering the
DNS server addresses
manually. The address can
be obtained from your
mobile phone network
provider.
Making entries
X To enter the provider: in the list of access
data (Y page 154) confirm the Provider
input field by pressing W.
An input menu appears.
To enter the access data: in the list of
access data (Y page 154) confirm the
Access point: input field by pressing W.
X Instructions for entering characters using
the controls can be found in the "Operating
COMAND" section (Y page 27).
To enter the user ID: in the list of access
data (Y page 154) confirm the User ID:
input field by pressing W.
X Instructions for entering characters using
the controls can be found in the "Operating
COMAND" section (Y page 27).
Enter the provider. Instructions for entering
characters using the controls can be found
in the "Operating COMAND" section
(Y page 27).
To enter the password: in the list of
access data (Y page 154) confirm the
Password: input field by pressing W.
X Instructions for entering characters using
the controls can be found in the "Operating
COMAND" section (Y page 27).
COMAND Online and Internet
i Most mobile phone
Setting access data
156
To set the DNS address: in the list of
access data (Y page 154) confirm the DNS
address: input field by pressing W.
The # dot in front of an entry indicates the
current setting.
Using previously set Internet access
data for another mobile phone
If the access data is already available in the
list of mobile phone network providers, you
can use it for another mobile phone.
The following prerequisites are required for
this:
Rthe
mobile phone must be connected
access data must apply to the mobile
phone contract of the currently connected
mobile phone
X Select a provider in the list of mobile phone
network providers (Y page 153) by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
After you select the provider, the list of
mobile phone network providers is closed.
The selected provider is entered.
COMAND Online and Internet
Rthe
Select Automatic or Manual with the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Automatic negotiates the DNS addresses
automatically.
Manual uses the entries in DNS 1 and DNS
2.
Entering the example DNS
After selecting Manual, select the DNS1
input field with the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X For example, enter 172.28.4.81. Instructions for entering characters using the controls can be found in the "Operating
COMAND" section (Y page 27).
Slide XVY the COMAND controller to call
up the carousel view.
Managing access data of the mobile
phone network provider
Overview
The access data of the mobile phone network
provider can be:
Redited
Rcopied, edited and accepted for a new pro-
vider name
Rdeleted
i Changes that you make to the access
data of a mobile phone network provider
apply for all mobile phones that use this
access data.
Entering the DNS1
Setting access data
Editing the access data
Select a provider in the list of mobile phone
network providers (Y page 153) by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the symbol to the right of the entry
by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
157
Deleting access data of the mobile
phone network provider
Select a provider in the list of mobile phone
network providers (Y page 153) by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the symbol to the right of the entry
by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Confirm Delete by pressing W.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the access data.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the access data is deleted
and the name of the provider is removed
from the list of mobile phone network providers.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Confirm Edit by pressing W.
The access data is displayed.
X Edit the access data. A description of the
entry can be found in "Making entries" in
the "Manually setting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider" section
(Y page 155).
i When the Internet connection is active,
Copying, editing and saving access data
under a new provider name
COMAND automatically disconnects the
Internet after a preset time has elapsed during which neither COMAND Online nor the
Internet have been used.
An active Internet connection is identified by
the double arrows on the top right of the display.
X Select Settings in the carousel view
(Y page 151) by sliding ÆV and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Disconnect automatically
after: and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Select a provider in the list of mobile phone
network providers (Y page 153) by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the symbol to the right of the entry
by sliding VY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Confirm Copy provider entry by pressing W.
The access data is displayed.
X Edit the access data. A description of the
entry can be found in "Making entries" in
the "Manually setting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider" section
(Y page 155).
you cannot edit or delete the access data
of the currently set mobile phone network
provider.
Selecting the length of time for automatic disconnection of the Internet
COMAND Online and Internet
Establishing/ending a connection
158
COMAND Online and Internet
Select 5 min, 15 min or Off and press
W to confirm.
Off switches the function off.
Favourite (example)
Establishing/ending a connection
Press W the COMAND controller.
The Internet connection is established. An
active Internet connection is identified with
symbol :. The example shows a menu in
the Google™ POI search (Y page 166).
Establishing the connection
i The conditions for establishing a connection are described in the "General notes"
section (Y page 150).
To establish the connection: select the
globe icon in the main function bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller until the COMAND Online panel or a
favourite are brought to the front, if these
have been created (Y page 180).
i If a phone call is made at the same time
as the active Internet connection, the ¡
symbol is displayed in :. The Internet connection remains active depending on the
mobile phone and mobile phone network
used.
or
Enter a URL (web address) (Y page 174).
To cancel the connection: while the connection is being established, confirm Can‐
cel by pressing W.
or
COMAND Online panel
Press the ~ button on COMAND or the
multifunction steering wheel.
Options
159
Ending the connection
Press the ~ button on COMAND or the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
Select the scissors symbol on the bottom
right of the carousel view and press W to
confirm.
i If the mobile phone Internet connection is
cancelled, COMAND tries to reconnect.
You should therefore always close the connection in COMAND or on the multifunction
steering wheel.
Options
Introduction
You can select options for the following
COMAND Online services:
RPOI
search
display
RPOIs download
You can reset the selected options to the
default settings.
Rweather
Calling up the options menu
Select the globe icon in the main function
bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
Options menu
Selecting options for the POI search
Overview
You can adjust the following features for the
POI search:
Rsearch
radius
provider
X Select Local search (POIs) in the
options menu by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The menu shows the current settings.
Rservice
COMAND Online and Internet
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the COMAND Online panel to the front
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X Select Options by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Options
160
Select an entry and press W to confirm.
The selected service provider is accepted.
Deleting/saving search queries
COMAND Online and Internet
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Setting the search radius
Confirm the entry after Search radius:
by pressing W.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
search radius.
Select the Delete all searches entry by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Select an entry and press W to confirm.
The selected setting is accepted.
Selecting options for the weather display
Overview
You can adjust the following features for the
weather display:
Rdefault
Rdefault
view (e.g. current weather)
location (e.g. current vehicle posi-
tion)
Rweather data for the map view (e.g. precip-
itation radar)
X Select Weather in the options menu
(Y page 159) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The menu shows the current settings.
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The selected setting is accepted.
Selecting a service provider
Select the entry after Service pro‐
vider: by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
service provider.
i If the entry is greyed out, you cannot
select the service provider.
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Options
161
Setting the default view
You can specify which view is called up after
activating the weather display (Y page 169).
You can make the following settings:
Rcurrent
R5-day
weather
forecast
Rinfo
view
Confirm the entry after Default view: by
pressing W.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
default view.
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The selected location is accepted.
Selecting weather data for the map
view
The weather map can display the following
weather data:
Rhazard
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The selected view is accepted.
Setting the default location
You can make the following settings:
Rcurrent
Rcurrent
position
destination
Rpresets
Select the entry after Default location:
(Y page 160) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
default location.
reports (e.g. storms, slippery conditions)
Rprecipitation radar (e.g. rain, snow)
Ratmospheric pressure conditions
Rtemperatures
Rcloud cover
Rwind direction and speeds
You can select one feature each for the map
view.
X Select the entry after Default map view:
(Y page 160) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the currently selected
feature.
COMAND Online and Internet
Rlast
Options
162
Select an entry and press W to confirm.
The selected feature is accepted.
Setting the options for the POIs download
Overview
You can make the following settings:
Rspecify
the ID for the download
the type of import
Rdelete/save POIs after they have been
imported to the server
X Select Download POIs in the options menu
(Y page 159) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The menu shows the current settings.
COMAND Online and Internet
Rspecify
Enter an e-mail address. Instructions for
entering characters can be found in the
"Entering characters in the phone book and
address book" section (Y page 27).
X After entry, select ¬ and press W to
confirm.
The e-mail address is entered in the menu.
An e-mail will be sent to your e-mail address
shortly afterwards. You must confirm it
within 48 h, as your current ID will otherwise continue to be used.
X To complete the settings, check your mailbox and follow the link in the e-mail.
Setting the type of import
To exit the menu: select Back by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Specifying the ID for the download
You can choose between the vehicle identification number (SendToCar ID) and your email address. The vehicle identification number is usually entered.
X Confirm the entry after SendToCar ID:
(Y page 162) by pressing W.
An input menu appears.
You can choose between manual and automatic importing.
X Select the entry after Import:
(Y page 162) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Select Manual or Automatic and press
W to confirm.
The setting is accepted.
Deleting/saving POIs after they have
been imported to the server
Select the entry after Import & delete:
(Y page 162) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
The setting is accepted.
Special destination search
Yes deletes the POIs after importing to the
server.
No does not delete the POIs on the server.
i Routes and destinations are automatically deleted on the server after seven
days.
Resetting adjustments
163
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the COMAND Online panel to the front
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The COMAND Online menu appears.
X Bring the Google Local search (POIs)
panel to the front and press W to confirm.
Select the globe icon in the main function
bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the COMAND Online panel to the front
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X Select Options by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Reset and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to reset.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the settings are reset.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Special destination search
Introduction
There are three options for the POI search:
Rtop
search queries
Rfree text search
Rall search queries
Calling up the POIs search menu
Select the globe icon in the main function
bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
To exit the menu: select Back by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Free text search
Entry restriction
It is only possible to enter a search term in
the input menu when the vehicle is stationary.
Entering a search term
Confirm Free text search in the POI
search menu by pressing W.
An input menu appears.
COMAND Online and Internet
Special destination search
164
COMAND Online and Internet
To enter using the character bar: enter
the search term. Instructions for entering
characters using the character bar can be
found in the "Entering characters in the
phone book and address book" section
(Y page 28).
X To enter characters using the number
pad: press the number keys in rapid succession.
The character appears when the key is
pressed. The first available letter is highlighted. Instructions for entering characters using the number pad can be found in
the "Entering characters in navigation
mode" section (Y page 25).
After entering the search term, select
¬ by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears. Here, you can select
where the POI search should begin.
Selecting the search position
The POI is entered and confirmed.
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
COMAND searches for available POIs for
the search term entered:
Rnear the current vehicle position
Ralong the calculated route
Rnear the destination
Rnear an address
X After selecting Near address, enter an
address and confirm. Instructions for
entering characters can be found in the
"Entering characters in navigation mode"
section (Y page 25).
The search results are displayed.
Google™ search results (example)
Five search results per page are shown.
X Scrolling forwards/backwards through
pages: select Query results 6-10 in the
Special destination search
(Y page 95). You can adopt the POI from
this memory and save it permanently in the
destination memory (Y page 94).
Using search results
Select an entry in the list of search results
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
To call up a POI: select Call with the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You then switch to the telephone function
and make the call (Y page 123).
i The menu item is greyed out if there is no
phone number available.
To import a POI: select Import with the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You can choose whether you want to save
the POI as a personal POI on the SD memory card or in the address book.
i If there is no SD memory card in the slot,
the As personal POI menu item is greyed
out.
To show the detailed view: confirm
Details by pressing W the COMAND controller.
The address of the POI is displayed.
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
To use a POI as the destination: select
Navigate to by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You then switch to navigation mode and
can start route calculation (Y page 56).
i The POI is stored in the "Last destinations" memory at the same time
To save as a personal POI: confirm As
personal POI by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
The entry is saved as a personal POI on the
SD memory card.
i You can use a personal POI in navigation
mode for route calculation, see the "Personal POIs" section under "Selecting as the
destination" (Y page 74).
If the personal POI is saved on the SD memory, you can also use it for route calculation
in another vehicle.
COMAND Online and Internet
example by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The entry Back to results 1-5 is available on the next page for scrolling backwards.
165
Special destination search
COMAND Online and Internet
166
To save to the address book: select To
address book by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The entry is stored in the address book.
To display the weather data: select
Weather by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The weather data is displayed at the POI
location (Y page 169).
Select the search criteria and press W to
confirm.
X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the
search position" section (Y page 164).
All search queries
This function offers you all the previous
search queries.
Top search queries
This function allows you to search using predefined search criteria.
Bring Search history in the POI search
menu to the front by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The previous search queries are displayed.
Bring Popular searches in the POI search
menu to the front by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu displays the available search criteria.
Select the search criteria and press W to
confirm.
X Proceed as described in the "Selecting the
search position" section (Y page 164).
Downloading special destinations
167
Downloading special destinations
Introduction
Step 1: sending POIs to the server
Call up the website for Google™ maps on
the Internet.
X Select a POI.
X Select "Mercedes-Benz" as the company
entry.
X Select the identification for the download
(e-mail address or vehicle identification
number).
With Exit you quit the POIs download.
With Options you set the options for the POI
download (Y page 162).
X Confirm the Download POIs panel by
pressing W.
Existing POIs are downloaded from the
server and displayed in a list. Entries from
the server are identified by the @ symbol.
i Instructions for setting the identification
can be found in the "Setting the options for
the POI download" section (Y page 162).
Confirm "Send" on the Google™ maps website.
The POIs are sent to the server.
Step 2: downloading POIs from the
server
Select the globe icon in the main function
bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Bring the COMAND Online panel to the front
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The COMAND Online menu appears.
Bring the Download POIs panel to the
front.
List with one route and two destination entries
You can download up to 20 routes and 50
destinations, POIs or geo-coordinates and
display them in a list. When you download
more navigation information, the oldest
entries are deleted.
i The POIs sent from Google™ maps to the
server are automatically deleted from there
after seven days.
COMAND Online and Internet
You can send POIs from Google™ maps to the
server and download these via the COMAND
Online POIs download. POIs are routes or
destinations, special destinations and geocoordinates. You can use POIs for route guidance and save them for further use.
Downloading special destinations
168
Step 3: using POIs
Calling up the menu
Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
COMAND Online and Internet
Example of a destination address
To call up a POI: confirm the entry by
pressing W.
i You can use this function when a mobile
phone is connected (Y page 114) and the
destination address includes a phone number.
Displaying details
Using a POI as the destination
Confirm Details in the menu by pressing
W the COMAND controller.
The route or destination is displayed.
Select Navigate to in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You then switch to navigation mode and
can start route calculation (Y page 56).
i The POI is stored in the "Last destinations" memory at the same time
(Y page 95). You can take the POI from this
memory and save it permanently in the
destination memory (Y page 94).
Importing POIs
Example of a route with a start and destination
When importing, you can choose whether you
want to save the POI as a personal POI on the
SD memory card or in the address book. You
can only save routes as personal POI, but not
in the address book.
X Select Import in the menu with the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
i If there is no SD memory card in the slot,
the As personal POI menu item is greyed
out.
Weather
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 196).
To save as a personal POI: confirm As
personal POI by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
The entry is saved as a personal POI on the
SD memory card.
i You can use a personal POI in navigation
mode for route calculation (Y page 74).
You can also use a personal POI in another
vehicle for route calculation.
X To save to the address book: select To
address book by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The entry is stored in the address book.
Deleting POIs
Rcloud
Rwind
cover
direction and speeds
Switching the weather display on/off
(COMAND Online)
Switching on
Select the globe icon in the main function
bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller until
COMAND Online is brought to the front and
press W to confirm.
The carousel view for COMAND Online
appears.
Select an entry in the list by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish
to delete the POI.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, the POI is deleted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Weather
Introduction
COMAND can receive weather forecasts anywhere in the world via online connection and
display it in an information chart (current day,
5-day forecast) or in the weather map.
The weather map can display the following
weather data with symbols:
Rhazard
reports (e.g. storms, slippery conditions)
Rprecipitation radar (e.g. rain, snow)
Ratmospheric pressure conditions
Rtemperatures
Turn cVd the COMAND controller until
Weather is brought to the front and press
W to confirm.
The information chart displays the current
weather in the previously selected location
(Y page 170), in the example, the current
vehicle position.
COMAND Online and Internet
169
Weather
170
Switching off
Press the % button.
or
COMAND Online and Internet
You see the following information:
Rthe
time of the current weather report
Rthe current temperature
Rinformation on the weather (e.g. cloudy,
rain)
Rthe maximum daytime temperature
Rthe minimum daytime temperature
Rthe probability of rain
Rthe forecast for the current day (three time
intervals)
X To switch to a five-day forecast: confirm
5-day by pressing W.
The information chart displays the forecast
for the next five days in the currently selected location.
Select Back by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, the carousel view will appear.
Displaying additional information
In addition to the current temperatures, you
can also display information such as humidity
and air quality (if the information is available).
X Select Info in the information chart by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The information chart displays information
for the selected location.
Selecting the location
Introduction
You can select the following options for the
weather forecast:
To return to the current weather information: confirm Current by pressing W.
Rthe
current vehicle position
destination
Ra winter sports area
Ra location anywhere in the world
You can select the location in the information
chart (option 1) or in the map (option 2).
Weather information is supplied by the nearest weather station.
Rthe
Option 1: selecting the location in the
information chart
Select a country, e.g. ANDORRA and press
W to confirm.
The available winter sports areas are displayed.
Select a winter sports area from the menu
and press W to confirm.
The information chart shows information
on:
Rtype of skiing
Rsnow conditions
Rtemperatures
To select the location: select Search
area in the menu by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
An input menu appears.
Select Position in the information chart
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
To select the current vehicle position:
confirm Current position by pressing
W.
To select the destination: select At des‐
tination in the menu by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
i You can select At destination if the
route has been calculated (Y page 56). The
menu item is otherwise greyed out.
To select a winter sports area: select In
winter sports areas in the menu and
press W to confirm.
A list of countries appears.
171
COMAND Online and Internet
Weather
Weather
172
COMAND Online and Internet
Enter the search area. Instructions for
entering characters can be found in the
"Entering characters in navigation mode"
section (Y page 25).
The information chart with the weather
forecast appears when the search area has
been entered.
To move the weather map: slide ZV the
COMAND controller to display the crosshair.
X Slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND
controller.
The weather map moves in the corresponding direction under the crosshair.
Entry
Example
Postcode
10117
City
Berlin
To change the map scale: as soon as you
turn cVd the COMAND controller, the
scale bar appears.
X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.
Address
Unter den Linden
i Data is downloaded again from the server
Airport code
TXL (Tegel Airport)
for these functions which may delay the
map being displayed.
Option 2: selecting the location in the
weather map
Call up the weather map and move to the
desired location (Y page 172).
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The menu bar is shown.
X Press W the COMAND controller again and
confirm Display weather.
The information chart displays the current
weather for the selected location.
Showing/hiding the menu in the
weather map
To show: press W the COMAND controller
in the weather map.
To hide: slide up ZV the COMAND controller.
Weather map
Calling up the weather map
Select Map in the information chart by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The map appears in a scale of 20 km.
Weather
Switching the weather information display in the map on/off
Display the menu in the weather map
(Y page 172).
X Select View by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
173
Select a weather characteristic by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The # dot indicates which weather characteristic is currently displayed on the map.
You can select one weather characteristic
at a time.
Legend
Display the menu on the weather map
(Y page 172).
Weather characteristic
Display in the map
Hazard icons
Displays warnings,
legend; see example
(Y page 173)
Weather radar
Displays the rain
radar as a coloured
area on the map,
legend; see example
(Y page 173)
Atmospheric
pressure
Displays air pressure with isobars
and as a coloured
area on the map
Temperatures
Displays the temperatures
Cloud cover
Displays the clouds
Winds
Displays wind direction with an arrow
and wind speed with
colouring
Select View by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Legend and press W to confirm.
The legend is displayed in accordance with
the currently selected weather characteristic.
Legend for warnings
Legend for precipitation radar
COMAND Online and Internet
Internet
174
Changing to the information chart
Internet
Display the menu in the weather map
(Y page 172).
Calling up a website
Select Display weather and press W to
confirm.
Memory functions
COMAND Online and Internet
Storing a location in the memory
Calling up the carousel view
Select the globe icon in the main function
bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
You can save locations that are called up frequently in ten preset positions (0, 1 - 9).
X Select the location (Y page 170).
Press and hold a number key.
When the location is saved, the number of
the selected preset comes before the name
of the place in the caption.
Selecting a location from the memory
Quick selection: when the weather display (COMAND Online) is switched on and
an entry is available, press a number key,
e.g. l.
The information chart appears and displays
the weather information.
From the weather memory: select Posi‐
tion in the information chart by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Presets and press W to confirm.
X Select a preset position that has an entry
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
The information chart appears and displays
the weather information.
You can now enter a web address (URL)
(option 1) or select it in the carousel view
(option 2).
To select in the carousel view, you must first
create favourites (Y page 180).
Option 1: entering the URL
You can enter the web address (URL) using
either the character bar or the number keypad.
X Select Enter URL by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
An input menu appears.
Internet
To enter using the character bar: enter
the URL in the input line.
Instructions for entering characters can be
found in the "At a glance" chapter
(Y page 28).
As soon as the first letter has been entered
in the input line, a list appears below it. The
list shows web addresses which begin with
the letters you have entered and web
addresses which have already been called
up.
The list is empty the first time you call it up.
sliding XVY the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The website is called up.
To select a web address in the list: slide
ZV the COMAND controller in the input
menu with the character bar.
The list is activated.
To enter characters using the number
pad: press the number keys in rapid succession.
The character appears when the key is
pressed. The first available letter is highlighted.
Detailed instructions for entering characters can be found in the "At a glance" section (Y page 26).
After entering the web address (URL),
select the ¬ symbol by turning cVd or
Select the web address by turning cVd or
sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The web address is entered in the input line.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The website is called up. The Establish‐
ing data connection to ... message appears.
Option 2: selecting favourites
You must create at least one favourite in the
carousel view for this function (Y page 180).
In the carousel view, bring a favourite to the
front by turning cVd or sliding XVY the
COMAND Online and Internet
175
176
Internet
COMAND Online and Internet
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The website is called up.
Internet
177
Navigating the website
Overview
Step
Activity
Navigates from one item that can be selected (e.g. link, text field or selection list) to the
next and highlights the respective element
on the website.
Turn cVd the controller.
Sliding the controller:
Moves the pointer on the page.
Left or right XVY
X Up or down ZVÆ
X Diagonally aVb
Press W the controller.
Calls up the menu or opens the selected
item.
Press the % button.
Calls up the previous page.
Press the j button.
Closes the Internet browser or the current
window, if there are several open.
Examples
Highlighting an item that can be selected
X Turn cVd the COMAND controller.
A button is highlighted in the example.
Enter the text using the character bar or the
number keypad.
Instructions for entering characters can be
found in the "At a glance" section:
REntering
Entering text
X Select an input line by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The character bar appears.
characters using the character
bar (Y page 28)
REntering characters using the number
keypad (Y page 26)
X If the text has been entered, select the
¬ icon by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The text has now been entered.
COMAND Online and Internet
Internet
178
COMAND Online and Internet
Start of menu
Menu functions
Calling up the menu
To call up the shortcut: highlight the
selectable item on the page by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
End of menu
Open
Opens the website to the selectable item.
X Confirm Open by pressing W the COMAND
controller.
To call up the entire menu: when the
shortcut is displayed, slide VÆ the
COMAND controller downwards.
or
Select a free area on the website by sliding
ZVÆ, XVY or aVb the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Open in new window
Opens the website in a new window. You can
open up to five windows simultaneously.
X Select Open in new window by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
To select a window: select View and press
W to confirm.
X Select Page selection and press W to
confirm.
X Select the website in the carousel view by
turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Internet
Add to favourites
Next
Adds the current website to the favourites.
The website can then be called up using the
carousel view. You can save up to 20 favourites in the carousel view.
X Select Add to favourites by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The The page has been added as a
favourites. message appears.
Calls up the next website.
X Select Next by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Calls up the favourites.
X Select Display favourites by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The favourites are shown in the carousel
view.
You will find further information in the
"Favourites" section (Y page 181).
View
You can use this function to:
Rposition
a selection window on websites
that are larger than the display
Rselect a window that is already open.
X Select View by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
X Press the z key on the number keypad.
i You cannot use the z key if a phone
call is being made.
Enter URL
Opens the input menu where you can enter
the web address (URL).
X Select Enter URL by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Enter the URL (Y page 174).
Reload
Reloads the website and updates the content.
X Select Reload by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Previous
Calls up the previous website.
X Select Previous by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
To position the selection window: confirm Full-screen view of current
page by pressing W the COMAND controller.
A selection window appears on the website.
COMAND Online and Internet
Display favourites
179
Internet
180
Settings
The settings are described in a separate section (Y page 183).
Close active window
Select Close active window by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
or
COMAND Online and Internet
Slide XVY, ZVÆ or aVb the COMAND
controller and position the selection window on the website.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The selected section is enlarged.
To display and select open windows:
select Display open windows by turning
cVd or sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The carousel view appears.
Press the j button to the right of the
COMAND controller.
i You cannot use the j button if a
phone call is being made.
Exit
Select Exit by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Internet browser is closed. If other windows are opened in the background,
another prompt appears.
Favourites
Introduction
Press W the COMAND controller.
The website is displayed.
Link details
Displays the complete web address of the
selected link (URL).
X Select Link details by turning cVd or
sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The URL appears.
X Press W the COMAND controller and close
the display.
Favourites are frequently visited websites.
You can create a favourite in the carousel
view (option 1) or in the menu (Y page 178)
using the Add to favourites menu item
(option 2).
Before creating a favourite in the carousel
view, you must first close active connections
(Y page 159).
You can select and edit favourites that you
have created.
Creating favourites
Option 1: creating in the carousel view
X Call up the carousel view (Y page 174).
Internet
Bring the Create new favourite panel to
the front by turning cVd or sliding XVY
the COMAND controller.
181
Selecting favourites
Call up the carousel view (Y page 174).
Select the favourite in the carousel view by
turning cVd or sliding XVY the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The favourite is opened.
Editing favourites
Press W the COMAND controller.
An input menu appears.
Enter the web address (URL) and name
using either the character bar or the number keypad.
Instructions for entering characters can be
found in the "At a glance" section:
characters using the character
bar (Y page 28)
REntering characters using the number
keypad (Y page 26)
X Select the ¬ icon and press W to confirm.
The favourite has been created.
Select (Y page 174)Edit in the carousel
view by sliding ÆV and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
An input menu appears.
Enter the web address (URL) and name
using either the character bar or the number keypad.
Instructions for entering characters can be
found in the "At a glance" section:
REntering
characters using the character
bar (Y page 28)
REntering characters using the number
keypad (Y page 26)
REntering
Option 2: adding to favourites
X When a website is displayed, call up the
menu (Y page 178).
X Select Add to favourites in the menu
and press W to confirm.
In the favourites menu
Select Display favourites in the menu
(Y page 178) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The favourite is displayed.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
The favourites menu appears.
COMAND Online and Internet
In the carousel view
Internet
182
COMAND Online and Internet
Favourites menu
Select Edit by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
Press the g button on the number keypad.
An input menu appears.
Enter the web address (URL) and name
using either the character bar or the number keypad.
Instructions for entering characters can be
found in the "At a glance" section:
REntering
characters using the character
bar (Y page 28)
REntering characters using the number
keypad (Y page 26)
Other functions in the favourites menu
Open
Opens the current favourites.
Confirm Open in the favourites menu
(Y page 182) by pressing W the COMAND
controller.
Open in new window
Opens the current favourites in a new window.
X Select Open in new window in the favourites menu (Y page 182) by turning cVd or
sliding ZVÆ the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Calling up details
X Select Details in the favourites menu
(Y page 182) by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
X Press the z button on the number keypad.
The detailed display appears.
Exit
X Select Exit in the favourites menu
(Y page 182) by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
X Press the % button to the left of the
COMAND controller.
The menu closes.
Deleting favourites
In the carousel view
X Select Delete in the carousel view
(Y page 174) by sliding ÆV and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A query appears.
X Select Yes and press W to confirm.
The favourite is deleted.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Internet
Settings
Call up the menu (Y page 178).
Select Settings by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Some websites save information in small
text files (cookies) in COMAND. You can
determine whether cookies may be stored.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
You can make other settings:
RCharacter
size
You can select the font size which is used
when displaying the website.
RCharacter code
You can select a different character set
here, e.g. if the characters of a website
appear distorted.
RDelete private data
Deletes data which has been saved by the
browser during Internet use.
i If you change the settings, the websites
may not be displayed correctly.
You can activate/deactivate the following
settings:
RDownload
images
It may take some time to download the
contents of websites that contain a large
amount of images. Therefore, it may be
useful to deactivate this option.
RBlock popups
Popups are windows (usually with advertisements) which are displayed automatically when you call up a website. You can
block these displays.
REnable Javascript
Javascript makes it possible to display and
interact with dynamic content on the website.
REnable cookies
Select Character size or Character
code by turning cVd or sliding ZVÆ the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
X Select a setting using the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Delete private data and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears.
COMAND Online and Internet
In the favourites menu
X Select Delete in the favourites menu
(Y page 182) by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
X Press the j button to the right of the
COMAND controller.
The favourite is deleted.
183
Internet
COMAND Online and Internet
184
Option
Function
All
Deletes all private
data.
Cache
Deletes data in the
temporary storage.
Cookies
Deletes cookies that
are created by websites which you have
called up.
Websites visited Deletes all websites
visited (path).
ODelete all
data on exiting
If this function is
activated O, all private data is deleted
when you exit the
Internet browser.
Select the setting by turning cVd or sliding
ZVÆ the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The # dot in front of an entry indicates
which setting is active.
or
Select Delete all data on exiting and
press W to confirm.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
i These settings are deleted when you reset
COMAND (Y page 48).
185
Vehicle equipment ............................
Radio mode and DAB radio mode ....
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........
Music search .....................................
MUSIC REGISTER ..............................
186
186
192
205
208
Audio
Operation with Bluetooth® audio .... 212
Media Interface mode ...................... 218
Audio AUX mode ............................... 223
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
186
DAB radio mode: you will hear the last station played from the last ensemble selected.
Vehicle equipment
i This manual describes all the standard
and optional equipment of your vehicle
which was available at the time of purchase. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle
may not feature all functions described
here. This also refers to safety-related systems and functions.
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
i Repeatedly pressing the $ function
button switches between the FM, MW, SW
and LW wavebands in that order and then
calls up DAB radio mode. Pressing the button again takes you back to FM radio mode.
Option 2
Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If radio mode or DAB radio mode was the
last mode selected, it is now active.
If another audio mode is switched on, you
can now switch to radio mode in the audio
menu.
You can select DAB radio mode in the radio
display.
Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The audio menu appears.
Audio
Introduction
i Portable electronic devices in the vehicle
may seriously impair radio and DAB radio
reception.
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is an optimised digital transmission standard designed
for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Several programmes are combined
into so-called ensembles and transmitted on
a single frequency. Digital radio stations can
be transmitted nationally, regionally or
locally.
Some stations only transmit programmes at
certain times. If you have selected a station
that is subsequently removed from the
ensemble, it will no longer be received. You
will continue to receive the other programmes in the ensemble. You must then
select another programme.
i DAB cannot be received everywhere in
Europe.
: Current audio operating mode
Switching on radio mode and DAB
radio mode
Option 1
Press the $ function button.
The radio or DAB radio display appears.
Radio mode: you will hear the last station
played on the last waveband selected.
; Main function bar
= Audio menu
Select Radio by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
DAB radio display
: Name of the ensemble to which the selec-
station
; Station name or station frequency of the
selected station
= Memory position of a station
? Radio text plus display (if available)
A Radio mode menu bar
To switch on DAB radio mode: select FM
in the radio display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
ted station belongs
; Name of the selected station
= Memory position of a station
? Radio text plus display (if available)
A DAB radio mode menu bar
i If reception is poor (e.g. in tunnels or
mountain valleys), affected stations are
shown in grey and playback of the currently
selected station is interrupted. As soon as
the reception quality is adequate, displays
and playback return to normal.
Switching wavebands
Option 1
You can switch the radio between the FM,
MW, LW and SW wavebands.
X Press the $ function button repeatedly
until the desired waveband is selected.
Select DAB and press W to confirm.
Option 2
Select FM, DAB, MW, SW or LW in the radio
display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select a waveband and press W to confirm.
You will hear the last station played on the
selected waveband.
Audio
FM radio display
: Waveband and frequency of the selected
187
188
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
i In the MW, LW and SW wavebands,
COMAND shows the station frequency
instead of the station name.
Quick select: turn cVd or slide XVY the
COMAND controller while the display/
selection window is active.
or
Ensembles (DAB radio mode)
Audio
An ensemble consists of multiple radio programmes. Every ensemble is transmitted in a
certain area (national, regional or local) in the
same way as a traditional AM/FM radio station.
Press the E or F button.
The needle jumps to the left or right.
To make a selection in the station list:
select Radio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Confirm Station list by pressing W.
The station list appears.
Switching to an FM station automatically
If the reception of a DAB radio station deteriorates, COMAND automatically changes to
the corresponding FM station under the following conditions:
Rthe
FM station's frequency is available.
Station fix(Y page 191) menu item
is switched off.
Rthe
i If you want to use this function, do not
switch to FM radio.
If there is no reception, the display shows the
No reception message.
Radio mode (example)
: Currently selected station
; Memory slot in station presets
Selecting a station
Selecting a channel from the channel
list
The station list is available in the FM waveband and in DAB radio mode.
Radio mode: the station list contains all the
stations that can currently be received and is
sorted alphabetically. For stations without a
programme service, the list shows the frequency instead of the name.
DAB radio mode: the station list contains the
stations of all the ensembles that can currently be received and displays the current
programme and a programme preview, if supported by the station operator. The station list
is sorted alphabetically.
DAB radio mode (example)
: Currently selected DAB radio station
; Current programme
= Start and end times of the programme
Select the station by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
To call up the programme preview: slide
VY the COMAND controller.
The next programmes are shown for the
displayed DAB radio stations.
X Switch back by sliding XV.
Using the multifunction steering wheel
Switch on radio mode in COMAND.
Press = or ; to select the Audio
menu.
Selecting stations via the station presets
Quick setting: press a number key, e.g.
l.
Directly in the station presets: select
Presets by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
or
Press W the COMAND controller when the
display/selection window is active.
The station preset memory appears. The
# dot indicates under which preset the
currently selected station is stored.
Select a station by turning cVd and press
W to confirm or press a number key, e.g.
l.
Using the multifunction steering wheel
: Radio mode (FM) set
; Currently selected station
Station ; is displayed with the station frequency or station name. If the station has
been stored, the associated preset is also
displayed in ;.
Press and hold 9 or :.
Press = or ; to select the Audio
menu.
Press 9 or : briefly.
Selecting stations by entering the frequency manually
This function is available in radio mode.
X Option 1: press the l button.
Selecting a station using the station
search function
In radio mode, the station search function is
only available for the MW, LW and SW wavebands.
X Press the E or F button.
Station search scans up or down and stops
at the next station found.
Option 2: select Radio in the radio display
by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Frequency entry and press W to
confirm.
Irrespective of the option chosen, an input
menu will appear.
Using the multifunction steering wheel
Enter a frequency using the number keys.
COMAND tunes in to the frequency
entered.
Press = or ; to select the Audio
menu.
Press and hold 9 or :.
Audio
189
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
190
Waveband
Frequency
FM (VHF)
87.5 – 108.0 MHz
MW (medium wave)
531 – 1620 kHz
SW (short wave)
5800 – 6250 kHz
LW (long wave)
153 – 282 kHz
i You can only enter currently permitted
numbers.
Audio
i If you enter a frequency in the MW, SW or
LW wavebands that is outside the frequency range, COMAND sets the next
lower frequency.
Storing stations
Storing stations manually
There are ten presets available for each waveband as well as for DAB radio mode.
X Quick save: press and hold a number key,
e.g. l, until you hear a tone.
The station is stored.
Directly in the station presets: press W
the COMAND controller when the display/
selection window is active.
or
Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
In both cases, the station presets appear.
The # dot indicates under which preset
the currently selected station is stored.
Station presets in DAB radio mode
Select a preset by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press and hold
W until you hear a tone.
The station is stored under the preset.
Storing stations automatically
This function automatically stores stations
with adequate reception under the presets.
The search starts at the lowest frequency.
COMAND stores any stations found, beginning with preset 1. The storing process ends
once the highest frequency has been reached
or once ten stations have been found. Any
stations stored manually under the presets
will be lost. COMAND may not occupy all
memory slots when storing.
X Option 1: press W the COMAND controller
when the display/selection window is
active.
X Select Autostore in the presets by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Option 2: select Presets by sliding VÆ
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
X Select Autostore and press W to confirm.
In both cases, COMAND searches for stations that can be received. You will see a
message to this effect. The available stations are automatically stored in the preset
positions.
Radio mode and DAB radio mode
To cancel storing: select Cancel and
press W to confirm.
Radio Data System (RDS)
General notes
The Radio Data System (RDS) provides inaudible additional information in the FM waveband. The system consists of a listening
receiver and a monitoring receiver.
The monitoring receiver constantly scans the
FM waveband and collects data from all the
stations with adequate reception, e.g. reception quality and RDS data such as programme
names and alternative frequencies. COMAND
stores the data and constantly updates the
memory. The audio receiver is therefore able
to switch automatically to an alternative frequency with a better signal.
i RDS only functions for stations which
transmit RDS data.
Switching RDS on/off
You can use the functions "Frequency fix" (FM
mode) or "Station fix" (DAB mode) to prevent
COMAND from switching between alternative
frequencies. This is useful, for example, when
the same content is broadcast with a time
delay, or when there is interference on one of
the frequencies.
X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select Frequency fix or Station fix by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Depending on the previous state, switch
Frequency fix on O or off ª.
Traffic Programme
Note
Many FM stations transmit traffic announcements (TA). You can also hear these in DAB
radio mode.
Switching traffic announcements on/
off
Option 1: select Radio by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The tick next to TA indicates that traffic
announcement reception is switched on.
You see the TA icon in the status bar.
X Select TA and press W to confirm.
TA are switched on or off, depending on the
previous status.
X Option 2: press and hold the 8 button
on COMAND or on the multifunction steering wheel until TA lights up or goes out in
the status bar.
A tone sounds.
Once traffic announcements have been
switched on, COMAND selects an RDS station.
The Traffic Programme is retrieved from:
Rthe
currently selected FM station
RDS station from the network of the
currently selected FM station
Rthe RDS station with the best reception
quality
When traffic announcements are switched
on, a traffic announcement will interrupt the
audio signal from the currently activated
audio or video source.
Ran
i Telephone conversations and navigation
announcements are not interrupted.
A display message appears in the display in
all audio operating modes.
Audio
191
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
192
Interrupting a traffic announcement
During a traffic announcement:
Briefly press the 8 button on COMAND
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
or
Audio
To display radio text: select Info in the
corresponding radio display by sliding VÆ
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
If the station supports radio text and information is available, the system displays it.
Press the 9, : or 9 button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
COMAND switches back to the audio
source that was selected before the
announcement. Any subsequent new
announcements will continue to interrupt
the audio source.
Radio text/radio text plus
Messages in the display
The function is available in FM mode and in
DAB radio mode.
Radio text/radio text plus consists of additionally transmitted data, e.g. information on
the current programme, which is displayed in
the COMAND display.
If the station supports radio text plus, the
artist and track are displayed.
Radio text (display for additional information on
programme)
To return to the radio display: confirm
Info by pressing W.
X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Important safety notes
G Risk of injury
Radio text plus (display: artist and track)
Showing/hiding the artist and track:
select Radio in the radio display by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Display artist and track and
press W to confirm.
This switches the function on O or off ª.
COMAND is classified as a class 1 laser product. You must not open the casing. If you open
the casing, or if the casing is faulty or damaged, there is a risk of exposure to invisible
laser radiation. This may damage your eyes,
or those of others.
COMAND does not contain any parts that can
be serviced by the user. For safety reasons,
all maintenance work must be carried out by
qualified aftersales technicians.
G Risk of accident
Only when the vehicle is stationary should
you:
Rload
a disc
a disc
Reject
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
There is a risk of being distracted from the
road and traffic conditions if this is done while
the vehicle is in motion.
To insert a CD/DVD into the magazine
tray: press the V load/eject button.
A menu shows the current load status of
the magazine trays. The last tray selected
is identified by a red digit.
Select a magazine tray to be filled by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
193
Inserting/ejecting CDs/DVDs
Notes
i If a medium contains other files in addition to music files, the loading time before
the first track starts to play may be longer.
Inserting a disc into the single DVD
drive
Press the 8 eject button.
If there is a disc already inserted, it will be
ejected.
X Take the disc out of the slot.
X Insert a disc into the slot.
The disc is drawn in and playback starts if
the disc has been inserted correctly and it
is a permissible type of disc.
or
Press a number key, e.g. j.
The DVD changer switches to the selected
magazine tray. You see the Please
wait... message.
You then see the Please insert disc
 message.
i Never insert a data medium before
COMAND prompts you to do so. Never
insert more than one disc at a time into a
magazine tray.
Ejecting a disc from the single DVD
drive
Press the 8 eject button.
X Take the disc out of the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot,
COMAND will draw it in again automatically
after a short while and load it again.
Inserting discs into the DVD changer
The DVD changer has a fixed magazine with
six trays.
Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards.
Audio
If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must
face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted.
If neither side is printed, the side to be played
should face downwards. CDs/DVDs with
copy protection may not be able to be played
by the system.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
194
The DVD changer loads the disc into the
selected magazine tray. You see the message: Loading disc ....
i It may take some time for the disc to be
loaded, depending on the type of disc. If no
disc is inserted for approximately 20 seconds, the display returns to the magazine
menu.
The DVD changer plays the disc if:
Rit
Rit
has been inserted correctly.
is a permissible type of disc
insert more than one disc at a time into a
magazine tray.
Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed side facing upwards.
You see the Please wait... message.
Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changer
switches to the next empty tray. You see
the message: Please insert disc .
X Repeat this step until all trays are loaded.
The DVD changer will play the last disc loaded if it has been inserted correctly and is
of a permissible type. This applies even if
not all trays have been loaded with a disc.
Audio
To cancel loading: press the V eject/
load button again or press the % back
button.
i If you cancel loading with the % back
button, the system loads and plays the last
CD you inserted.
Ejecting discs from the DVD changer
: Full magazine tray (eject function is avail-
able)
; Empty magazine tray (disc can be inserted)
To exit the menu: press the V eject/
load button again or press the % back
button.
or
If you remove one disc while playing another
disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback.
Playback continues once the disc has been
ejected.
X To eject a CD/DVD: press the V load/
eject button.
The magazine menu appears. The magazine
tray with the current disc is highlighted.
Select Back by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
To fill empty magazine trays: press the
V load/eject button.
The magazine menu appears.
X Select Fill empty slots.
You see the Please wait... message.
COMAND switches to the next empty magazine tray. You then see the Please
insert disc  message.
i Never insert a data medium before
COMAND prompts you to do so. Never
: Eject possible
; Data medium type
= Disc name (only if stored on the disc)
? Current disc
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Select a magazine tray containing a disc by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
or
Press a number key, e.g. j.
You see the message: Ejecting disc
.... Then you see the following message:
Select Eject all by sliding ÆV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The DVD changer ejects the last disc selected. You see the message: Ejecting
disc ....
X Take the disc out of the disc slot when you
see the Please remove disc  message.
The DVD changer switches to the next loaded magazine tray and ejects the disc.
X Repeat the last step until the magazine is
empty.
To exit the menu: press the V eject/
load button again or press the % back
button.
or
Take the disc out of the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot,
COMAND will draw it in again automatically
after a short while and load it again.
To eject all CDs/DVDs: press the V
load/eject button.
The magazine menu appears.
Select Back by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Inserting and ejecting an SD memory
card
General information
COMAND supports SD memory cards
(Secure Digital) and SDHC memory cards
(Secure Digital High Capacity).
i Not all memory cards available on the
market are designed for the temperatures
which may be reached in the vehicle.
Due to the wide range of SD memory cards
available on the market, playback cannot
be guaranteed for all brands of SD memory
card.
The readable storage capacity depends on
the memory card used. Further information
can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
Audio
195
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
196
Inserting an SD memory card
Option 2
Insert the memory card into the slot until it
engages in place. The side with the contacts must face downwards and point
towards the slot.
COMAND loads the memory card and
shows a message to this effect. If no MP3
tracks can be found, you will see a message
to this effect.
i By pressing the function button repeatedly, you can change the operating mode
in the following order:
Raudio
CD/DVD/video DVD/MP3 CD/
MP3 DVD in the DVD changer or single
DVD drive (disc mode)
Rmemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
RBluetooth® audio mode
Ejecting an SD memory card
Audio
Press the memory card.
The memory card is ejected.
X Take the memory card out of the slot
(Y page 15), position H.
Connecting a USB device
The USB port is located in the stowage compartment in the centre console.
Electrical consumption at this connection
must not exceed a continuous current of
500 mA. If the electrical consumption is
higher, use a separate source to provide
power for the USB device (e.g.
12 V power supply).
The following data formats are supported:
RAAC: fixed and variable bitrates (Low Com-
plexity profile)
RMP3, WMA: fixed and variable bitrates up
to 320 kbit/s
X Connect the USB device (e.g. USB stick) to
the USB port.
Activating audio CD/DVD or MP3
mode
Option 1
Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 193), SD memory
card (Y page 196) or connect a USB device
(Y page 196).
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
starts to play it.
Press the h function button one or more
times.
Select an audio medium from the media list
(Y page 198).
Option 3
Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The last active audio source is now activated.
You can activate another audio source via
the audio menu.
Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The audio menu appears.
Select Disc, Memory card, MUSIC REGIS‐
TER, USB storage or Media Interface
and press W to confirm.
This switches to the desired audio source.
Select an audio medium from the media list
(Y page 198).
Example display: audio CD mode
Example display: MP3 mode
: CD cover (if available)
: Cover (if available)
; Track time
; Track time
= Track number and track name (only if
= Track number and track name
stored on the disc as CD text or if Gracenote® data is available)
Graphic time and track display
Disc type, disc position in the media list
and disc name (only if stored on the disc
as CD text or if Gracenote® data is available)
Artist (only if stored on the disc as CD text
or if Gracenote® data is available)
CD mode menu
Example display: audio DVD mode
? Graphic time and track display
A Disc type, disc position in the media list,
current folder
B Artists (if available)
C MP3 mode menu
i If no Media Interface (Y page 218) is connected during operation with a DVD
changer, C displays Changer instead of
Media.
Pause function
In audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
To pause playback: briefly press the
8 button.
The , icon appears at the top left in the
status bar.
X To continue playback: briefly press the
8 button again.
The , icon disappears.
: Cover (if available)
; Track time
= Track number
? Graphic time and track display
A Disc type, disc position in the media list,
disc name (only if stored on the disc)
B Audio DVD mode menu
197
Audio
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
198
Only in audio DVD mode
Audio
To pause playback: switch on audio DVD
mode (Y page 196).
X Select Ë by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press W to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted. The Ì display changes
to Ë.
Selecting CD/audio DVD/MP3 discs
Selecting via the media list
In CD/audio DVD and MP3 mode: select
Media or Changer by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The media list appears. The # dot indicates the current medium being played.
Stop function
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 196).
To interrupt playback: select É by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. É
remains highlighted.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press W to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press W to
confirm.
Media list when equipped with a DVD changer
: To display all magazine trays
The media list shows the discs currently available.
i If a disc cannot be read, an entry appears
next to the corresponding magazine tray.
To display all magazine trays: press W
the COMAND controller while : is highlighted.
or
Select É and confirm by pressing W
twice in rapid succession.
Ì is highlighted.
X To restart playback: select Ì and
press W to confirm.
Playback starts at the beginning of the
DVD.
Media list showing all magazine trays
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
For DVD changer
Magazine trays, positions 1 to 6: readable
data media are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3
DVDs, audio DVDs and video DVDs.
Memory card, position 7
Selecting a track
Selecting by skipping to a track
or
MUSIC REGISTER, position 8
USB storage device, position 9
Media Interface, position 0
Bluetooth® audio
Equipped with a single DVD drive
DVD drive, position 1: readable data media
are audio CDs, MP3 CDs or MP3 DVDs,
audio DVDs and video DVDs.
Memory card, position 2
MUSIC REGISTER, position 3
USB storage device, position 4
To skip forwards or back to a track: turn
cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
The skip back function skips to the beginning of the current track if the track has
been playing for more than 8 seconds. If
the track has been playing for less than 8
seconds, it skips to the start of the previous
track.
If you have selected the playback options
Random tracks or Random folder, the
track order is random.
On the multifunction steering wheel:
switch COMAND to audio CD, audio DVD or
MP3 mode (Y page 196).
X Press = or ; to select the Audio
menu.
Media Interface, position 5
Bluetooth® audio, position 6
Select the data medium by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
i If you select a video DVD, the system
switches to video DVD mode
(Y page 232).
Selecting a track using the number keypad
Press a number button, e.g. n, when the
display/selection window is active.
The medium at the corresponding position
in the media list is loaded and then played.
Display for DVD changer (example)
: Track display
Press 9 or : briefly.
Press and hold the 9 or : button
until the desired track has been reached.
If you hold down 9 or :, the system
runs through the list more quickly. Not all
audio drives or data carriers support this
function.
Audio
The following tables list the selection options
for the respective equipment variants.
199
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
200
If track information is stored on the audio
drive or data storage device, the multifunction display shows the number and name of
the track.
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The list of categories appears.
Selecting a track using the number keypad
Audio
Press the ¯ button on the number keypad.
A numerical entry field appears. The number of positions offered corresponds to the
number of tracks on the CD/DVD. Only
numbers that correspond to a track number on the CD/DVD can be entered.
X Enter the desired track number using the
number buttons.
The track plays after the last possible number is entered.
i Pressing and holding a number button for
2 seconds or more completes entry and the
corresponding track is played.
Select Current tracklist, Folder or a
category and press W to confirm.
Selecting a track using music search
Select music via categories with the music
search function.
If you select a category which does not contain any music data, COMAND starts a music
search using the following media (if inserted
or connected):
Rdisc
(audio CD/DVD/MP3)
Rmemory card
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
The Track information is complete
message appears once the search is completed. COMAND stores the music data in its
own database. You can now select the available music data within the desired category.
You will find further information on searching
for music in the "Music search" section
(Y page 205).
X In audio CD/audio DVD mode/MP3 mode,
select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks
in alphabetical order.
Select the track by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The basic display appears and the track is
played.
Fast forward/rewind
While the display/selection window is
active, slide XVY and hold the COMAND
controller until the desired position has
been reached.
or
Press and hold the E or F button
until the desired position is reached.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Introduction
This function is only available in audio CD
mode.
There is a version of the music recognition
software from Gracenote®, Emeryville, California, USA on the hard disk. You will recognise this by the logo which can be seen in the
bottom right-hand corner of certain audio displays.
Many audio CDs contain CD text. COMAND
uses the information contained therein to display the artist, album and track name.
If the audio CD does not contain any CD text
information, COMAND can use the Gracenote
Media Database to identify unknown audio
tracks when running in audio CD mode. This
is only possible if the relevant information is
saved in the Gracenote Media Database and
if the "Gracenote Media Database" function
is activated.
If this is the case, COMAND will display the
corresponding data such as artist, album and
track name in the relevant displays and lists.
If COMAND accesses the Gracenote Media
Database when reading an audio CD, you will
see the following message:
Selecting Gracenote® data to be displayed
If several entries exist for the CD of a particular artist, you can select which of the entries
should be shown.
If the inserted CD does not contain any Gracenote® data, the Gracenote Media Data‐
base menu item is shown in grey and cannot
be selected.
X Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 196).
X Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Gracenote Media Database by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
The # dot indicates the current selection for
the display.
X Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Switching the Gracenote® data display
on/off
Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 196).
Select CD by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Gracenote Media Database by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Audio
Gracenote Media Database
201
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
202
To switch off the display: select None and
press W to confirm.
In the basic display (Y page 197), Track
1, Track 2 etc. are shown instead of the
Gracenote® data, for example.
To switch on the display: select an entry
in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Audio
Updating Gracenote® music recognition technology and the Gracenote
Media Database
The digital data on the Gracenote Media Database becomes obsolete due to the release of
new CDs. Optimum functionality can only be
attained with up-to-date Gracenote® music
recognition technology. Information about
new versions can be obtained from a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
You can have your music recognition software updated there with a DVD, or you can
update it yourself.
i The Gracenote Media Database is updated in conjunction with the navigation system's digital map (Y page 107).
Displaying the track and album
Press the z button.
The current track and album are displayed
in a window.
Displaying metadata (MP3 mode)
COMAND can also display the album name
and artist (metadata) during playback, if this
information has been entered into the system.
For USB devices, you can choose to display
the metadata contained in the tags of the
encoded music data, or to display the file and
directory names during playback.
X To display the album and artist name:
select MP3 or USB in the basic display by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Display track information and
press W to confirm.
Setting the audio format
You can only set the audio format in audio
DVD mode. The number of audio formats
available depends on the DVD. The content of
an audio DVD is called an "album", and this
can be divided into up to nine groups. A group
can contain music in different sound qualities
(stereo and multichannel formats, for example), or bonus tracks. Each group can contain
up to 99 tracks. If an audio DVD only contains
one audio format, the Group menu item(s)
cannot be selected.
X Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 196).
X Select DVD-A by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Group by turning cVd and press
W to confirm.
The list of available groups appears. The
# dot indicates the group currently selected.
X Select Group by turning cVd and press
W to confirm.
X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
controller or press the % back button.
Selecting an active partition (USB
mass storage devices only)
You can select this function for USB mass
storage devices when the storage device is
partitioned. Up to four partitions (primary or
logical; FAT format) are supported.
i The Windows® formatting program supports FAT partitioning up to 32 GB as standard.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Select MP3 or USB in the basic display by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Select active partition and
press W to confirm.
Playback options
The following options are available to you:
RNormal
track sequence
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
In MP3 mode, the track order is determined
by the order in which the tracks are written
to the MP3 data carrier when it is created.
Alphabetical order is the most common.
Once all the tracks in a folder have been
played, the tracks in the next folder are
played.
RRandom media
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
RRandom track list (MP3 mode only)
The tracks in the current track list or the
currently active folder are played in a random order.
X To select options: switch on audio CD/
DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 196).
X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected.
X Select an option by turning cVd and press
W to confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options
except "Normal track sequence", you will
see a corresponding display in the display/
selection window. See the example of the
display in audio CD mode (Y page 197).
i The "Normal track sequence" option is
automatically selected when you change
the medium you are currently listening to
or when you select a different medium. If
an option is selected, it remains selected
after COMAND is switched on or off.
Notes on MP3 mode
General notes
Depending on the volume and format of the
MP3 data, the length of time required for
reading the data may increase.
Permissible discs
RCD-R
and CD-RW
and DVD-RW
RDVD+R and DVD+RW
RSD memory card:
RUSB storage device
RDVD-R
Audio
203
Permissible file systems
RISO
9660/Joliet standard for CDs
for audio and video DVDs
RFAT16 or FAT32 for SD memory cards and
USB storage media
RUDF
Multisession CDs
For multisession CDs, the content of the first
session determines how COMAND will process the CD. COMAND plays only one session
and gives priority to the audio CD session.
If possible, use COMAND to play only CDs
which have been written in one session.
File structure of a data carrier
When you create a disc with compressed
music files, the tracks can be organised in
folders. A folder can also contain subfolders.
A disc can contain a maximum of 255 folders.
Each folder can contain a maximum of
255 tracks and 255 subfolders.
The disc may contain no more than eight
directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level
will not be recognised by the system.
Audio
204
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Track and file names
Permissible bit and sampling rates
When you create a disc with compressed
music files, you can assign names to the
tracks and folders.
COMAND uses these names accordingly for
the display. Folders which contain data other
than MP3 or WMA tracks are not displayed by
COMAND.
If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root
directory itself, the root directory will also be
treated as a folder. COMAND will then show
the name of the root directory as the folder
name.
You must observe the following when assigning track names:
COMAND supports MP3 files of the following
types:
Rtrack
names must have at least 1 charac-
ter.
Rtrack
names must have the extension
"mp3" or "wma".
Rthere must be a full stop between the track
name and the extension.
Example of a correct track name:
"Track1.mp3".
Permissible formats
COMAND supports the following formats:
RMPEG1
Audio Layer 3 (MP3)
RMicrosoft Windows Media Audio V8 and V9
(WMA) without copy protection
Radditional music files in AAC format with
the file extensions .aac, .mp4, .m4a
and .m4b, but not copy-protected iTunes
music files with the extension .m4p.
i If, as well as MP3 files, there are other
music files in these audio formats stored on
the disc, loading may require longer before
the first track is played.
i The MP3 audio encoding method is under
licence from Fraunhofer IIS (Institut Integrierte Schaltungen – Institute for Integrated
Circuits) and Thomson.
Rconstant
and variable bit rates from
32 kbit/s to 320 kbit/s
Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
COMAND supports WMA files of the following types:
Rfixed
bit rates of 5 kbit/s up to
384 kbit/s
Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
COMAND does not support WMA files of the
following types:
RDRM
(Digital Rights Management) encrypted files
Rvariable bit rate
RWMA Pro
R5.1 Surround
i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least
128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a noticeable deterioration in quality. This is especially the case if you have activated a surround sound function.
Notes on copyright
MP3 or WMA tracks that you create or play
back are generally subject to copyright protection in accordance with the applicable
international and national regulations.
In many countries, reproductions, even for
private use, are not permitted without the
prior consent of the copyright holder.
Make sure that you know about the applicable
copyright regulations and that you comply
with these.
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your
own compositions and recordings, or if the
copyright holder has granted you permission,
these restrictions do not apply.
Music search
Discs with copy protection are not compatible with the audio CD standard and therefore
may not be able to be played by COMAND.
There may be playback problems when playing copied discs. There is a wide range of data
carriers, disc-writing software and writers
available. This variety means that there is no
guarantee that the system will be able to play
discs that you have copied yourself.
There may be playback problems if you play
CDs that you have copied yourself with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB. CDs of
this type do not conform to the currently
applicable standards.
i On many DVD audio discs, the last track
does not contain any music and COMAND
then switches to the next disc. This is normal system behaviour and does not mean
that there is a malfunction.
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.
They could peel off and damage the drive.
The drive is designed to hold discs which
comply with the EN60908 standard. Therefore, you can only use discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that
contain data on both sides (DVD on one
side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage the drive.
Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm,
even with an adapter. Only use round discs
with a diameter of 12 cm.
i COMAND is able to play back audio CDs
in multichannel audio format.
Music search
Calling up a category list
Switch on an audio source and call up the
basic display, e.g. CD mode (Y page 197).
Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The category list appears.
Category list
The categories are displayed according to the
data available. The categories Current
tracklist, Folder, Playlists (if available)
and Photos (if available) are already
assigned. The other available categories are
filled by the music search.
Selecting a category
Starting a music search
The music search starts when you select a
category from the category list which does
yet have any contents.
The music search finds tracks via all available
media. The search begins with the audio
source that is currently active.
The following media are included for the
music search:
Rdisc
mode (audio CD/DVD/MP3)
card
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
X Select a category in the category list by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The Reading data... message appears.
The search may take some time, depending
on the number of tracks available.
Rmemory
Audio
Notes on CDs/DVDs
205
Music search
Audio
206
The Track information is complete
message appears once the search is completed. Playback then starts with the previously
active audio source.
X To cancel the music search: confirm
Cancel by pressing W.
Selecting a year of publication
Selecting an album
Select a track and press W to confirm.
Playback starts.
Select Year in the category list
(Y page 205) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
Select Albums in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The available albums are displayed alphabetically. If there is a cover available for an
album, it is displayed in front of the album
name.
Select an entry and press W to confirm.
The genre list is displayed.
X Select a genre, e.g. pop, and press W to
confirm.
The track list is displayed.
Select a track and press W to confirm.
Playback starts.
Selecting a track
Selecting a cover
Select Tracks in the category list
(Y page 205) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The available tracks are displayed.
Select Select by cover in the category
list (Y page 205) by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The available covers are displayed in alphabetical order of the artists.
Music search
Select the desired cover by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The corresponding album is played.
Select an entry by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Select an entry, e.g. Artists, and press
W to confirm.
The album and cover (if available) are displayed.
Confirm the album with W.
The tracks on the album are displayed.
Audio
Selection via keyword search
207
Select Keyword search in the category list
(Y page 205) by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
An input menu appears.
Enter characters and confirm the entry.
Instructions for entering characters can be
found in the "Entering characters in the
phone book and address book" section
(Y page 28).
Depending on the entry, the hits are shown
in a list.
MUSIC REGISTER
208
If music files are available, playback begins at
the point last listened to.
If there are no music files, you will see a message to this effect.
X Confirm the message by pressing W the
COMAND controller and then copy the
music files in to the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 209).
Option 2
Audio
Select a track and press W to confirm.
Playback starts and the basic display
appears.
Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If MUSIC REGISTER was the last mode
selected, it is now switched on.
If another audio source is switched on, you
can now switch on the MUSIC REGISTER in
the audio menu.
Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The audio menu appears.
Select Music Register and press W to
confirm.
MUSIC REGISTER
General notes
You can store music files in a compressed
format in the MUSIC REGISTER
(Y page 209). The memory has a capacity of
10 GB.
! Retain the original music files in a secure
location. If you, for example, accidentally
reset COMAND to the factory settings with
the reset function, all music files in the
MUSIC REGISTER are deleted. MercedesBenz is not liable for any loss of data.
Switching to MUSIC REGISTER
Option 3
Press number key r (for a DVD
changer) or m (for a single DVD drive).
The MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.
Option 1
Press the h function button repeatedly
until the MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
you can change the operating mode in the
following order:
Raudio
CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)
card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
RBluetooth® audio mode
Rmemory
MUSIC REGISTER (example)
: Cover (if available)
; Track time
MUSIC REGISTER
209
= Track number and track name
? Graphic time and track display
A Position of the medium in the media list
Copying music data to the MUSIC
REGISTER
Introduction
You can copy music files in the file formats
MP3, WMA and AAC (with the file extensions .m4p, .m4a, .m4b and .aac) from the
following media:
Select the data medium by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
The data medium is loaded.
If the data carrier contains music files that
can be copied, you see a menu.
Rdiscs
in a DVD changer or a single DVD
drive
Rmemory card
RUSB storage device
i While copying, several functions will not
be available. If this is the case, you will see
a message to this effect.
1. Selecting a data medium
Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 208).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Select Copy MP3 music files and press
W to confirm.
The media list appears. A data carrier from
which files can be copied is selected automatically.
2. Selecting music files
To select all music files: select All
music files and press W the COMAND
controller to confirm.
This function copies all music files on the
selected data carrier. The icon in front of
All music files is filled in and all following entries have a tick O beside them.
To select a folder: : turn cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
A tick O next to the folder entry highlights
the selection.
Audio
and name of the medium, followed by the
current playback option (no display for
normal track sequence)
B Artist
C MUSIC REGISTER menu bar
MUSIC REGISTER
210
3. Confirming your selection
Select Continue by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The copying menu appears.
ISTER display appears. Now you can copy
more music files to the MUSIC REGISTER.
X To cancel the copying process: select
Cancel and press W to confirm.
Music files are stored in the MUSIC REGISTER up until the point of cancellation.
4. Starting the copying process
Deleting all music files
This function deletes all music files from the
MUSIC REGISTER.
! In order to prevent malfunctions, do not
use COMAND during this time.
Audio
In the example, music files are copied from
the memory card to the MUSIC REGISTER.
X To select a target folder: select Desti‐
nation folder by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Folder and press W to confirm.
The folder is selected O.
X Select Continue and press W to confirm.
Confirm Start by pressing W.
Copying begins. The progress bar indicates
the status of the copying procedure.
! Under no circumstances should you
remove the medium while you are copying
data from it (SD memory card, USB storage
device, CD/DVD). Doing so will generate
unusable data in the MUSIC REGISTER.
i It may take some time for the copying
process to be completed, depending on the
amount of data. If there is not enough memory space, you will see a message to this
effect.
Once copying is complete, you hear the first
track on the album copied. The MUSIC REG-
Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 208).
Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
Select Delete all music files and
press W to confirm.
A query appears. No is highlighted.
If you select Yes, all music files are deleted.
You see the Please wait... message.
Then, you see the Deletion procedure
successful message.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Calling up memory space info
Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 208).
Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Memory info and press W to confirm.
The following is displayed:
Rstorage capacity
Ravailable memory
Roccupied memory
Rcontent (folders, tracks)
MUSIC REGISTER
The music search finds tracks via all available
media. The search begins with the audio
source that is currently active.
The following media are considered for the
music search:
Rdisc
(audio CD/DVD/MP3)
card
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 208).
X Select Search by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The category list appears.
X Select a track in a category (Y page 205).
Rmemory
Example: opening a folder
Select Folder in the category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
or
Press W the COMAND controller when the
display/selection window is active.
You see the contents of the current folder.
The name of the current folder is at the top
and the track currently playing is indicated by
a # dot.
To switch to the next folder up: press the
% back button or slide XV the
COMAND controller.
Changing the folder/track name
Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 208).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Rename/delete files and press
W to confirm.
X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.
X Select Options by sliding VY and press
W to confirm.
X Select Change and press W to confirm.
X Enter a name for the folder/track. Instructions for entering characters can be found
in the "Entering characters in the phone
book and address book" section
(Y page 28).
X To save the changes: select ¬ and
press W to confirm.
Deleting folders/tracks
Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 208).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
X Select Rename/delete files and press
W to confirm.
X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.
X Select Options by sliding VY and press
W to confirm.
X Select Delete and press W to confirm.
A query appears. No is highlighted.
If you select Yes, the folders/tracks are
deleted. You see the Please wait...
message. Then, you see the Data
deleted message.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Playback options
The following options are available:
RNormal
track sequence
Audio
Music search
211
Audio
212
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
RRandom media
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order.
RRandom track list (MP3 mode only)
The tracks in the currently active folder/
track list are played in a random order.
X To select options: switch on the MUSIC
REGISTER (Y page 208).
X Select Music Register by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected.
X Select an option and press W to confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal track sequence, you will
see a corresponding display in the display/
selection window.
Before using Bluetooth® audio mode, you
should check your Bluetooth® audio device
for the following (see the Bluetooth® audio
device's operating instructions):
Bluetooth® audio profile
The Bluetooth® audio device must support
the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth® audio
profiles.
i A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio data
transmission
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile): Bluetooth® audio profile for audio data
playback
Conditions
Bluetooth® visibility
On certain Bluetooth® audio devices, as
well as activating the Bluetooth® function,
the device itself must also be made "visible" for other devices (see the Bluetooth®
audio device's operating instructions).
X Bluetooth® device name
Every Bluetooth® device has its own Bluetooth® device name. This device name is
freely definable, but can be identical for all
devices from the same manufacturer. You
should therefore change the name of the
device so that you can correctly identify
your Bluetooth® audio device (see the Bluetooth® audio device's operating instructions).
X Activate Bluetooth® and Bluetooth® visibility on the Bluetooth® audio device.
Bluetooth® audio device
Bluetooth® audio mode requires a Bluetooth®-capable audio device.
On COMAND
X Activate the Bluetooth® function in
COMAND (Y page 46).
i The Normal track sequence option is
automatically selected when you change
the disc you are currently listening to or
when you select a different medium. If an
option is selected, it remains selected after
COMAND is switched on or off.
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
Connecting Bluetooth® audio devices
i Not all Bluetooth® audio devices available
on the market are equally suitable. You can
obtain more detailed information about
suitable Bluetooth® audio devices and
about connecting Bluetooth® audio devices to COMAND from your Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre or on the Internet (http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect).
General information
Before using your Bluetooth® audio device
with COMAND for the first time, you will need
to authorise it.
When you authorise a new Bluetooth® audio
device, it is connected automatically. Con-
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
213
nection involves first searching for a Bluetooth® audio device and then authorising it.
You can authorise up to fifteen Bluetooth®
devices.
i If you authorise a mobile phone that sup-
Searching for and authorising a Bluetooth® audio device
Switch on Bluetooth® audio mode
(Y page 215).
If you see the No Bluetooth audio
device authorised message, you will
need to connect the Bluetooth® audio
device first.
X Select BT audio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Confirm Bluetooth audio device list
by pressing the COMAND controller W.
X To search: confirm Update by pressing the
COMAND controller W.
COMAND searches for Bluetooth® audio
devices within range and adds them to the
Bluetooth® device list. Bluetooth® audio
devices are detected if they support the
Bluetooth® audio profiles A2DP and
AVRCP.
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth® audio devices within
range and their characteristics.
Bluetooth® device list (example)
: Newly detected mobile phone with Blue-
tooth® audio function in range
; Bluetooth® audio player not within range
but previously authorised (icon appears in
grey)
The Bluetooth® device list displays all authorised devices, whether they are within range
or not. After a device search, devices which
are within range but not authorised are also
displayed.
X To authorise: select an unauthorised Bluetooth® audio device from the list (example: :) by turning cVd the COMAND controller.
X Select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth® audio device by sliding VY the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Authorise and press W to confirm.
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device
used, you now have two options for continuing with authorisation.
X Option 1: enter the passcode. To do so,
proceed as described in the "Authorising
(registering) a mobile phone" section
(Y page 115).
After successful authorisation, the Bluetooth® audio device is connected and
starts playing.
X Option 2 (Secure Simple Pairing): if the
digit code displayed in COMAND and on the
Audio
ports Bluetooth® audio, the A2DP and
AVRCP Bluetooth® audio profiles are connected automatically. The mobile phone is
then entered in both the Bluetooth® telephone list (Y page 115) and in the Bluetooth® device list (Y page 213).
Mercedes-Benz recommends authorising a
mobile phone in Bluetooth® telephony
(Y page 115).
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
214
Bluetooth® audio device is the same, confirm Yes by pressing W.
If you select Yes, authorisation continues
and the Bluetooth® audio device is connected. Playback starts.
If you select No, authorisation will be cancelled.
i The Bluetooth® audio device must support the Bluetooth® version 2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing.
COMAND creates a six-digit code, which is
displayed on both devices that are to be
connected.
Audio
External authorisation: COMAND may
not be able to locate your Bluetooth® audio
device due to the specific security settings
of the Bluetooth® audio device itself. In this
case, check whether your Bluetooth® audio
device can locate the COMAND system
(Y page 116). The Bluetooth® device name
of COMAND is MB Bluetooth.
After successful authorisation, the Bluetooth® audio device is connected and
starts playing.
i With some Bluetooth® audio devices,
playback must be initially started on the
device itself, so that COMAND can play the
audio data.
Reconnecting a Bluetooth® audio
device
The Bluetooth® audio profiles are connected
automatically under the following circumstances:
Rone
of the last two mobile phones to have
been connected has also been used as a
Bluetooth® audio player.
Rthe mobile phone takes over the automatic
connection itself.
A Bluetooth® audio player without telephone
functions is not automatically reconnected,
even if it was the last device connected.
If the No Bluetooth audio device con‐
nected message appears, you have two
options to connect a Bluetooth® audio
device:
Option 1
Confirm Connect last device in the
basic display by pressing the COMAND
controller W.
If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth®
audio device, it will be connected and start
playing.
i With some Bluetooth® audio devices,
playback must be initially started on the
device itself, so that COMAND can play the
audio data.
Option 2
Select BT audio by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Confirm Bluetooth audio device list
by pressing the COMAND controller W.
Select a Bluetooth® audio device by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth®
audio device, it will be connected and start
playing.
i With some Bluetooth® audio devices,
playback must be initially started on the
device itself, so that COMAND can play the
audio data.
Bluetooth® audio device and simultaneous search for mobile phones
During the search for mobile phones
(Y page 115), the connection with the Bluetooth® audio device is terminated. In the
Bluetooth® audio (Y page 216) basic display,
you will see the No Bluetooth audio
device connected message and the Con‐
nect last device menu item cannot be
selected.
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
Select a Bluetooth® audio device in the
Bluetooth® device list.
X Select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth® audio device by sliding VY the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select Details and press W to confirm.
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
RBluetooth® name
RBluetooth® address
Ravailability status (is shown after a new
search)
Rauthorisation status
X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or
slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Switching on Bluetooth® audio mode
Option 1
Option 2
Press the h function button one or more
times.
i By pressing the function button repeatedly, you can change the operating mode
in the following order:
RAudio
CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)
card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
RBluetooth® audio mode
RMemory
De-authorising (de-registering) a Bluetooth® audio device
Select a Bluetooth® audio device in the
Bluetooth® device list.
X Select the symbol to the right of the Bluetooth® audio device by sliding VY the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select De-authorise and press W to confirm.
A prompt appears asking whether you
really wish to revoke authorisation for this
device.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the device will be deleted
from the Bluetooth® device list.
If you select No, the process will be aborted.
Connecting (Y page 212) or reconnecting
(Y page 214) a Bluetooth® audio device.
COMAND activates the Bluetooth® audio
device. The basic display appears and the
device starts playing.
Option 3
Select Bluetooth audio(Y page 198) in
the media list by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
COMAND activates the connected device.
You will see a message to this effect. The
basic display then appears.
i Before re-authorising the Bluetooth®
audio device, you should also delete the
device name MB Bluetooth from your
Bluetooth® audio device's Bluetooth® list
(see the Bluetooth® audio device's operating instructions).
Audio
Displaying details
215
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
216
To continue playback: select Ì by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
A message appears. Selection is at É.
Starting playback if the Bluetooth®
audio device has been stopped
Bluetooth® audio basic display when equipped
with a single DVD drive (example)
: Track name
Audio
; Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
= Album name
During the search for mobile phones
(Y page 115), the connection with the Bluetooth® audio device is terminated. In the
Bluetooth® audio basic display (Y page 216),
you will see the No Bluetooth audio
device connected message and the Con‐
nect last device menu item cannot be
selected.
? Sound settings
A Media list
B Artist
C To stop É or start Ì playback
D To connect a Bluetooth® audio device, to
switch traffic announcements on/off, to
increase the volume on COMAND
E Bluetooth® Audio data medium type
F Data carrier position in the media list
i If the Bluetooth® audio device connected
supports metadata and corresponding data
is available, then the artist, track and album
name can be displayed.
Starting/stopping playback
To start playback: select Ì by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Playback starts. Selection is at É.
To stop playback: select É by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A message appears. Selection is at Ì.
When the search is finished, the Bluetooth®
audio device can be reconnected.
X Confirm Connect last device by pressing W.
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device
used, playback starts immediately or you
must start playback manually.
In this case, you will see the Bluetooth
audio device paused message.
X
To start playback: select Ì by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Playback then starts from the beginning.
have been played, the tracks in the next
folder are played.
RRandom tracks
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
X Select BT audio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The # dot indicates the option selected.
X Select the option by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
If you select Random tracks, you will see
a corresponding icon in the display/selection window.
Selecting a track
The function is not supported by all Bluetooth® audio devices.
X To skip forwards or backwards to a
track: press the E or F button on
COMAND.
or
X Press the 9 or : button briefly on
the multifunction steering wheel.
X Rapid scroll: press and hold the 9
or : button on the multifunction steering wheel until the desired track is reached.
If you hold down 9 or :, the system
runs through the list more quickly.
Selecting playback options
If the Bluetooth® audio device supports the
corresponding function, the following options
are available:
Switching Traffic Programme on/off
A description can be found in the "Radio Data
System" section (Y page 191).
Adjusting the sound settings
The sound settings are described using radio
mode as an example in the "Basic functions
of COMAND" section (Y page 31).
Increasing the volume using COMAND
Select BT audio by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Volume and press W to confirm.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
RNormal
track sequence
The tracks are played in the normal order
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
Audio data playback is determined by the
order in which the tracks are written to the
data carrier. Alphabetical order is the most
common. Once all the tracks in a folder
217
Audio
Operation with Bluetooth® audio
Media Interface mode
218
follow the instructions in the "Media Interface" section.
Connecting an external device
i Do not leave external devices in the vehi-
Audio
cle as their correct function cannot be guaranteed if they are subjected to extreme
temperatures, e.g. if subjected to direct
sunlight or very low outside temperatures
(see the operating instructions of the
respective device). Mercedes-Benz
accepts no liability for damage to external
devices.
Never connect more than one device at a
time. You will otherwise not be able to play
back from the external device.
Select Standard or Boost and press W to
confirm.
You will find further information in the "Audio
AUX Mode" section (Y page 223).
Media Interface mode
Connection options
Overview
The connection sockets are located in the
stowage compartment in the centre console.
Device-specific adapter cables, included in
the Media Interface scope of delivery, are
required to connect external devices to the
Media Interface.
i Store individual parts in a safe place.
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz connection cables.
You can connect the following data carriers
to COMAND via the Media Interface:
for MP3 players (audio and video)
; iPod® plug, to connect an iPod®
= USB socket, to connect an MP3 player
? Example of device, iPod®
RiPod®
Rcertain
: 4-pole socket for 3.5 mm stereo jack, e.g.
MP3 players
i iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple
Inc., Cupertino, California, USA.
Supported devices
For further details and a list of supported
devices, contact a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre or go to the website http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. Then,
Connect the external device with suitable
socket :, ; or =.
COMAND activates the device, a message
appears.
If you remove a device, the No device con‐
nected message appears.
i A connected iPod® or MP3 player should
not be simultaneously operated via the
Media Interface and the remote control
(e.g. Bluetooth® remote control) or directly
on the device itself as this may cause
unforeseen technical difficulties.
Media Interface mode
iPod® or MP3 player can result in an extended initialisation period.
Error messages appear while the device is
being activated if:
RCOMAND does not support the device con-
nected (External device unavailable
message).
Rthe connected device consumes too much
power.
Rthe Media Interface connection is faulty.
Ra mass storage device (e.g. USB stick or
USB hard disc) is connected to the Media
Interface (Please connect the device
to the other USB port message).
By pressing the function button repeatedly,
you can change the operating mode in the
following order:
RAudio
CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)
card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
RBluetooth® audio mode
RMemory
Option 3
i The separate USB port ensures fast
access and additional options for selecting
the media content.
i Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
if you have any queries.
Switching to Media Interface mode
General notes
In extreme cases, starting up individual functions can take up to several minutes – this
depends on the external device and its content (e.g. video podcasts).
Only use the original programs to populate an
iPod or MP3 player. Otherwise, some or all
functions may not be available.
Press number key i (for a DVD
changer) or o (for a single DVD drive).
This directly selects the connected external
audio device.
Option 4
Select the entry under position 0 (DVD
changer) or position 5 (single DVD drive) in
the media list (Y page 198) by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
COMAND activates the connected device.
You will see a message to this effect. The
basic display then appears.
If no device is connected, you will see the
Media Interface entry instead of a
device name.
Option 1
Connect an external device (Y page 218).
COMAND activates the device. The basic
display then appears.
Option 2
Press the h function button one or more
times.
Media Interface mode (iPod® mode) when equipped with a DVD changer
: Data medium type
; Track number
Audio
i Connecting an exhaustively discharged
219
Media Interface mode
220
playback option other than Normal track
sequence, the track sequence is random.
= Elapsed track time (also in format
Audio
00:00:00 for audio books)
Track name
Graphic time display
Graphic track display
Sound settings
Media list
Album name (if available)
Music search
Position in the media list
Artist (if available)
Playback options
Type of device : connected is indicated by
the corresponding symbol for iPod® or MP3
player.
The current playback option (Y page 203) is
shown with a symbol behind album name
E (no display for Normal track sequence).
On the multifunction steering wheel:
switch on Media Interface mode in
COMAND (Y page 219).
X On the multifunction steering wheel, press
the = or ; button to select the
Audio menu.
X Briefly press the 9 or : button.
If you hold down 9 or :, the system
runs through the list more quickly. Not all
media players support this function.
If track information is available on the
media player, the multifunction display
shows the number and name of the track.
Selecting using the number keypad
To make an entry: press the l button.
An input menu appears. The number of
characters available for input depends on
the number of stored tracks.
To enter a track number: press a number
key, e.g. q.
The digit is entered in the first position in
the input line.
i If the device connected does not contain
any playable tracks, a message appears to
this effect.
Selecting music files
Note
COMAND displays the data stored on the
iPod® or MP3 player according to the filing
structure used in the respective medium.
Selecting by skipping to a track
To skip forwards or back to a track: turn
cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.
or
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track. The skip back function skips to the
beginning of the current track if the track
has been playing for more than eight seconds. If the track has been playing for less
than eight seconds, it skips to the start of
the previous track. If you have selected a
i COMAND will ignore and not display an
invalid digit.
Enter more numbers if desired.
The track plays after the last possible number is entered.
i Pressing and holding a number button for
2 seconds or more completes entry and the
corresponding track is played.
Fast forward/rewind
While the display/selection window is
active, slide XVY and hold the COMAND
controller until the desired position has
been reached.
or
Press and hold the F or E button
until the desired position is reached.
Media Interface mode
221
i On an iPod®/iPhone®, fast rewind only
functions within the current track.
Selecting a category/playlist/folder
Overview
RCurrent
Category list (example)
tracklist
(e.g. All)
RPlaylists
RArtists
Select Current tracklist by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The contents of the current track list
appear.
RAlbums
RTracks
RPodcasts
RGenres
RComposers
RAudiobooks
i Some playback categories contain the
entry All. If this entry has been selected,
the entire content of the category selected
will be played.
Calling up a category list
Select Search in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The list of categories appears.
Current track list (example)
: Icon for next folder up
; Device icon and device name
= Track symbol
? Current track
Select the track by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
The track is played.
To switch to the next folder up: slide
XV the COMAND controller or press the
% button.
i The Search menu item is not available
until the device has been activated.
Audio
iPod® and selected MP3 players
For an iPod® or MP3 player, you can select
tracks using categories or folders.
Depending on the device connected, the following categories may be available, for example:
Media Interface mode
222
Playing back the contents of a category
or folder
Select the category or folder by turning
cVd the COMAND controller.
X Press W the COMAND controller for longer
than two seconds.
The content of the category or folder selected is played in accordance with the playback option (Y page 203) selected.
Audio
Alphabetical track selection
iPod® and MP3 players
This function is available for alphabetically
sorted categories and folders. This function
is not available for albums or playlists, for
example.
X Select a category, e.g. Artists, by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The available artists are displayed.
Playback options
The following options are available:
RNormal
track sequence
Normal track sequence: you hear the
tracks in their normal order (e.g. numerical
or alphabetical).
RRandom media
All the tracks on the medium are played in
random order.
RRandom track list
The tracks in the currently active category
or folder, including any subfolders, are
played in random order.
i For MP3 players, the random playlists
offer a maximum of 300 tracks chosen at
random.
To select a playback option: select
Media Interface in the basic display by
sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option selected.
Select an option and press W to confirm.
Press the corresponding number key once
or several times to select the first letter of
the artist's name (e.g. for an artist beginning with the letter "C", press number key
l three times).
The available letters are listed at the lower
edge of the display.
After a message, the first entry in the list
which matches the letter entered is highlighted.
i If no corresponding entry exists, the last
entry corresponding to a previous letter is
highlighted instead.
i For iPods® and MP3 players, the quality
of the search results is highly dependent on
the version and language variant of the
software (e.g. iTunes® version) used to
populate the device.
If different sorting rules are defined (e.g. in
iTunes®), the search is cancelled without
any result.
Notes for the MP3 player
Data formats
MP3 and WMA are supported as data formats
with fixed and variable bitrates (up to
320 kbits/s).
Notes on MP3 players
Up to eight directory levels with up to 1,000
tracks per directory are supported.
Do not use USB extension leads or adapters.
They can impair functionality.
i DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected files are not supported by the Media
Interface.
Audio AUX mode
223
Audio AUX mode
You can connect an external audio source
(AUX) to COMAND. The socket for this is located in the glove compartment.
If COMAND is equipped with a Media Interface, external audio sources are connected
using the cable set provided. The cable set
then replaces the audio AUX socket. The connections for the Media Interface are located
in the stowage compartment in the centre
console.
i You can find more information on the
Internet at http://www.mercedesbenz.com/connect and in the "Media
Interface mode" section (Y page 218).
Activating audio AUX mode
When you connect an external audio source,
audio AUX is not selected automatically.
X Select Audio in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If AUX mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be active.
If another audio source is switched on, you
can now switch to audio AUX mode in the
audio menu.
X Select Audio using ZV and press W to
confirm.
The audio menu appears.
Select Aux using cVd and press W to confirm.
The audio AUX menu appears. The medium
in the external audio source is played, if the
source is connected and playback selected.
Please see the respective operating instructions for how to operate the external audio
source.
You will find details on volume (Y page 30)
and sound (Y page 31) settings in the "At a
glance" section.
G Risk of accident
External audio sources may have different volumes, which can mean that system messages
such as traffic announcements and navigation
system announcements are much louder. If
necessary, please deactivate the system messages or adjust their volume manually.
Increasing the volume using COMAND
In some cases, the volume of the external
audio device may be quieter or louder, or the
usual maximum possible volume may be
lower. On some devices, it is possible to
adjust the volume separately. In this case,
start at a medium volume and increase it
gradually. This enables you to determine
whether the system is able to play the music
at high volume without distorting it.
X Select Volume in the AUX display by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
Audio
Notes on audio AUX mode
Audio AUX mode
224
Audio
Select Standard or Boost and press W to
confirm.
Standard: the volume of the external audio
source is adjusted to a standard value.
Boost: the volume of the external audio
source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
225
226
226
226
227
232
238
239
Video
Vehicle equipment ............................
General information .........................
Basic settings ....................................
TV mode .............................................
Video DVD mode ...............................
Video AUX operation ........................
Picture viewer ...................................
226
Basic settings
Vehicle equipment
i These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your vehicle at the time it was purchased. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features described.
Video
General information
Automatic picture shutoff
If the vehicle is travelling faster than approximately 5 km/h, the picture automatically
switches off in the following modes:
RTV
mode (with teletext)
DVD mode
The following message appears in the display:
In order not to distract you from
the traffic situation, the picture
is faded out while the vehicle is in
motion.
As soon as the vehicle speed drops below
about 5 km/h, the picture switches back on
again.
RVideo
Where operating steps can be carried out in
the active main function using the number
keys, the following functions are not possible:
Rselecting
TV channels from the channel
presets
Rstoring TV channels in the channel presets
Basic settings
Picture settings
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or
colour
The following describes the TV, video DVD
and video AUX modes.
X Press W the COMAND controller in TV or
video DVD mode and show the menu.
X Select TV, DVD-V or Aux by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Background video mode
If another main function is active, e.g. navigation, you can perform the following operations in TV and video DVD mode. A window
shows information about the selected function.
Using the E or F button, you can:
Rselect
Rselect
a TV channel
a scene or chapter (video DVD
mode)
Rfast-forward or rewind (video DVD mode)
Example display: TV mode
: Brightness, contrast and colour
; Picture formats
Select Brightness, Contrast or Colour
by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
Changing the picture format
The following describes the TV, video DVD
and video AUX modes.
TV mode
Press W the COMAND controller in TV or
video DVD mode and show the menu.
X Select TV, DVD-V or Aux by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
Select Automatic, 16:9 optimised, 4:3
or Widescreen and press W to confirm.
The dot in front of the entry indicates the
currently selected format.
Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Switching to TV mode
Select Video in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If TV mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be active.
If another mode is switched on, you can
now switch on TV mode in the video menu.
X Select Video and press W to confirm.
The video menu appears.
Video
TV mode
Reception quality
Portable electronic devices in the vehicle may
seriously impair TV reception.
The TV tuner is designed to receive analogue
terrestrial TV channels (all standards) and
digital TV channels conforming to the DVB-T
standard7. If the reception deteriorates, the
TV receiver automatically switches to an
alternative frequency (digital or analogue
transmission) transmitting the same programme content with better reception, as
soon as a corresponding channel can be
received.
The constantly changing reception conditions
while the vehicle is in motion can interrupt the
signal. If the reception is too poor,
COMAND can switch off the sound and freeze
or hide the picture. To indicate this, an icon
of a radio tower, struck through, appears in
the display.
227
Video menu
Select TV and press W to confirm.
You see the last TV channel selected, provided it can still be received.
Hiding/showing the navigation menu
To show: turn cVd or slide ZVÆ the
COMAND controller.
To hide: slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
or
Wait for approximately eight seconds.
DVB-T may not be available in some countries, or may not be available in all areas.
TV mode
228
= Information on the current programme
(only for digital TV channels)
? To switch on teletext
A Sound settings
Selecting TV channels
Video
Selecting channels from the navigation
menu
Navigation menu displayed
: Preset position of the selected TV channel
; Selected TV channel
or
= Current programme (digital TV receiver
only)
? Next TV channel in the channel list (channel name or number)
A To show the menu
B Previous TV channel in the channel list
(channel name or number)
Showing/hiding the menu
To show: press W the COMAND controller.
or
Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press W to confirm.
X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller
and confirm Full screen by pressing W.
Menu shown
: TV options
; Channel preset list
Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller.
Press the E or F button.
The TV tuner selects the previous or next
channel from the alphabetical channel list.
Selecting a station from the station list
As soon as the vehicle or COMAND is in operation, the background reception function of
the TV tuner lists the channels that can currently be received in the channel list.
The channel list contains the following information, if it is transmitted and can be
received:
Rthe
names of the channels that can be
received
Rthe name of the current and next programme on each channel
Rinformation text about the current programme
Rthe name of digital radio stations; these are
listed below the TV channels
The background reception function requires
a certain amount of time to update this information. COMAND can only display the information if the TV channels are transmitting it
and if the reception conditions are adequate.
The electronic programme guide (EPG) supplies the titles of the current and upcoming
programmes, as well as the information text
about the current programme.
TV mode
229
Select the channel by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
Video
The channel list is sorted alphabetically and
contains:
Ranalogue
TV channels (all standards)
TV channels (DVB-T standard)
Rdigital radio stations (DVB-T standard)
Rdigital
i The radio stations are optically separated
from the TV channels by a dotted line.
To set a channel using COMAND: press
W the COMAND controller to show the
menu.
X Select TV by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Channel list and press W to confirm.
The channel list appears. The # dot in
front of a list entry indicates the currently
selected channel. A number before the list
entry shows the memory slot in the channel
presets.
Select the channel and press W to confirm.
To set a channel using the multifunction steering wheel: switch on TV mode
in COMAND (Y page 227).
X Press = or ; to select the Audio
menu.
X Press and hold 9 or :.
Selecting channels via the channel presets
To set a channel using COMAND: press
W the COMAND controller to show the
menu.
X Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The channel preset memory appears. The
# dot in front of a preset position indicates that the currently selected channel is
stored there.
Channel presets
or
Press a number key, such as l.
i If you press the s number key, for
example, the preset view changes and the
corresponding channel name becomes visible.
X To set a channel using the multifunction steering wheel: switch on TV mode
in COMAND (Y page 227).
X Press = or ; to select the Audio
menu.
X Press 9 or : briefly.
Selecting channels by entering the
channel and programme number
Several programmes can be transmitted on
one channel with digital TV. You can therefore
enter a channel and the desired programme
on this channel.
Only one programme can be sent on a channel with analogue TV. The programme entry
function therefore has no effect.
X Option 1: press W the COMAND controller
to show the menu.
X Select TV by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Channel entry and press W to
confirm.
TV mode
230
Video
Option 2: press the l button while the
TV is playing.
Irrespective of the option, an input bar
appears at the top of the screen.
X Press the corresponding number keys to
enter the channel/programme number.
X Confirm by pressing the COMAND controller W or press and hold the number key
until the character bar disappears.
The channel is set.
i If you have not entered a programme
number, the first programme with adequate reception will be set for a digital
channel.
i You can enter channels or programmes
available in your country even if the reception is currently not adequate.
If you enter channels which are not intended for your country or are not allowed
there, the Invalid channel number message appears.
Press W the COMAND controller and confirm the message.
Storing TV channels
Storing channels manually
There are ten preset positions available.
X To call up the channel presets: press
W the COMAND controller to show the
menu.
X Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The channel preset memory appears. The
# dot in front of a preset position indicates that the channel currently selected is
stored there.
X To select a preset: turn cVd the
COMAND controller.
To store a channel: press and hold the
COMAND controller W until you hear a
tone.
or
Press and hold a number key such as
l until you hear a tone.
Then, the TV picture reappears.
i If you press number key s, for example, the channel preset display changes
and the corresponding preset becomes
visible.
Storing channels automatically
This function automatically stores channels
with adequate reception in order of their
reception quality. Any channels stored manually in the preset memory will be lost.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Presets by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select Autostore and press W to confirm.
COMAND searches for channels with adequate reception. The available channels are
automatically stored in the preset positions.
Information about the current programme
This function is only available for digital TV
channels and digital radio stations.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select Info by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
You will see the information if it is provided
by the selected TV channel. The information field otherwise remains empty.
i It may take a few seconds for the information to appear.
TV mode
231
Displaying the current programme or
programme preview
: TV channel
; Next programme
= To display the current programme
? The beginning and end of the programme
To show the current programme: select
Display current programme and press
W to confirm.
X To close the display: press the % button.
Basic TV settings
Fixing the frequency
: Current TV channel
; To display the programme preview
= Current programme
? Visual display of the elapsed programme
time
To show the programme preview: select
Display programme preview and press
W to confirm.
The channel list shows the channel's next
programme.
The TV tuner may automatically switch to an
alternative channel with the same programme content but better reception,
depending on reception quality. You can use
Channel fix to prevent this channel switching. This is useful, for example, when the
same content is broadcast with a time delay,
or when there is interference on one of the
frequencies.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select TV by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Channel fix and press W to confirm.
X Depending on the previous status, the function is switched on O or off ª. When the
Video
This function is only available for digital TV
channels and digital radio stations. The programme preview is also referred to as the
electronic programme guide (EPG).
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select TV by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select Channel list.
The channel list appears. It shows the current programme on the digital TV channels
and digital radio stations which have adequate reception. The # dot in front of a list
entry indicates the currently selected channel.
Video
232
Video DVD mode
function is switched on, FIX appears in the
display window.
X To exit the menu: slide XVY the COMAND
controller.
pages, and stores them in the system memory. If you set a different channel, the memory
is cleared and refilled.
Setting the reception region
The correct reception region setting ensures
that analogue TV channels can be received
with the usual quality and functionality.
COMAND is set to the correct reception
region at the factory. If you are driving your
vehicle in a different country or region, you
should set COMAND accordingly. A
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre can help you
to select the correct reception region.
X To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X Select TV by sliding VÆ and turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
X Select TV standard and press W to confirm.
A list appears, showing the reception
regions. The # dot in front of a list entry
indicates the currently selected reception
area or country.
X Select the reception area and press W to
confirm.
A message appears to inform you that if the
wrong country is set, correct reception will
not be possible.
X Select Yes or No and press W to confirm.
If you select Yes, COMAND will switch to
the country setting you have selected.
If you select No, the country list will appear
again.
Teletext
Introduction
Teletext can only be received if there is no
interference in the picture reception. The teletext function receives all teletext pages for
the channel currently set, excluding sub-
Switching teletext on/off
To show the menu: press W the COMAND
controller.
X To switch on: select Teletext by sliding
VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
To switch off: press and hold the %
back button.
The TV picture appears.
Selecting a teletext page
To access a page directly: press the corresponding number keys.
i You can only enter pages that are permissible for teletext between 100 and 899.
X To access the previous/next page: turn
cVd or slide ZV¬ the COMAND controller.
Dynamic teletext page
A dynamic teletext page consists of several
subpages. The display automatically changes
to the next page after a certain time.
Video DVD mode
Safety notes
G Risk of injury
COMAND is classified as a class 1 laser product. You must not open the casing. If you open
the casing, or if the casing is faulty or damaged, there is a risk of exposure to invisible
laser radiation. This may damage your eyes,
or those of others.
COMAND does not contain any parts that can
be serviced by the user. For safety reasons,
all maintenance work must be carried out by
qualified aftersales technicians.
Video DVD mode
Only when the vehicle is stationary should
you:
Rload
a disc
a disc
There is a risk of being distracted from the
road and traffic conditions if this is done while
the vehicle is in motion.
Reject
Notes about discs
COMAND can play back video DVDs produced according to the following standards:
Rregion code 2 (for Europe) or region code 0
(no region code)
or NTSC standard
You will generally find the relevant details
either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.
RPAL
i If you insert a video DVD with a different
region code, you will see a message to this
effect.
i COMAND is set to region code 2 at the
There may be playback problems when playing copied discs. There are a large variety of
discs, DVD authoring software, writing software and writers available. This variety means
that there is no guarantee that the system will
be able to play discs that you have copied
yourself.
factory. This setting can be changed at a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. This will
allow you to play video DVDs with a different region code, provided that they are produced in accordance with the PAL or NTSC
standard. The region code can be changed
a maximum of five times.
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs,
as they could peel off and damage
COMAND. Stickers can cause the disc to
bend, which can result in read errors and
disc recognition problems.
! COMAND is designed to accommodate
discs which comply with the EN 60908
standard. You can therefore only use discs
with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that
contain data on both sides (DVD on one
side and audio data on the other), they cannot be ejected and can damage COMAND.
Use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm.
Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm,
even with an adapter.
DVD playback conditions
There are video DVDs available on the market
which do not conform to the current standards. Such DVDs may have picture, sound or
other playback problems.
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, it is possible that certain functions or actions will be temporarily
blocked or may not function at all. As soon as
you try to activate these functions or actions,
you will see the K symbol in the display.
Inserting and removing DVDs
Proceed as described in the "Inserting and
ejecting CDs and DVDs" section
(Y page 193).
Activating video DVD mode
Option 1
Single DVD drive: insert a video DVD.
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
starts to play it.
Video
G Risk of accident
233
Video DVD mode
234
DVD changer: insert a video DVD.
Press the h function button or the
% back button.
COMAND loads the medium inserted and
starts to play it.
Option 2
Video
Press the h function button one or more
times.
COMAND switches to the previous disc
operating mode.
Hiding/showing the navigation menu
To display: slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
i This function is not available while the
DVD's own menu (Y page 236) is being
displayed.
X To hide: slide ZVÆ the COMAND controller.
or
X Wait for approximately eight seconds.
i By pressing this function button repeatedly, you can change the operating mode
in the following order:
Raudio
CD/DVD/video DVD/MP3 in the
DVD changer or DVD single drive (disc
mode)
Rmemory card mode
RMUSIC REGISTER
RUSB storage device
RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode
RBluetooth® audio mode
Select Media by sliding VÆ and turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select a ý video DVD from the media list
(Y page 236).
Option 3
Select Video in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If video DVD mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active.
If another video source is switched on, you
can now switch to video DVD mode in the
video menu.
Select Video by sliding ZV the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The video menu appears.
X Select Video-DVD and press W to confirm.
Navigation menu displayed
: Data medium type
; Current track
= Current scene
? Track time
A To show the menu
Showing/hiding the menu
This function is not available while the DVD's
own menu (Y page 236) is being displayed.
X To display: in full-screen mode, press W
the COMAND controller.
or
X Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press W to confirm.
To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller
and confirm Full screen by pressing W.
Video DVD mode
235
To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press W to
confirm.
During playback, confirm É by pressing
W twice in rapid succession.
Selection is at Ì.
To restart playback: confirm Ì by
pressing W.
Playback restarts from the beginning.
Menu shown
: Video DVD options
; Pause function
= Stop function
? Media selection (Changer or Media)
A Sound settings
Fast forward/rewind
In full-screen mode, slide XVY and hold the
COMAND controller until the desired position has been reached.
or
Press and hold the E or F button
until the desired position is reached.
You see the navigation menu.
Stop function
Press W the COMAND controller to show
the menu.
X To interrupt playback: select É by
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The
video image is hidden.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press W to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
Pause function
Press W the COMAND controller to show
the menu.
X To pause playback: select Ë by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press W to confirm.
The menu is hidden.
Selecting a scene/chapter
If the film is divided into scenes or chapters,
you can select them directly while the film is
running, or skip forwards step-by-step. Some
DVDs do not permit this at certain points (e.g.
during the opening credits).
It may also be possible to select the scene/
chapter from within the menu stored on the
DVD.
X To skip forwards or back: in full-screen
mode, turn cVd or slide XVY the
COMAND controller.
or
X Press the E or F button on the control panel.
The navigation menu (Y page 227) appears
for approximately eight seconds.
Video
or
Video DVD mode
236
Video
On the multifunction steering wheel:
switch on video DVD mode in COMAND
(Y page 233).
X Use the = or ; button to select the
Audio menu.
X Press 9 or : to select a scene/
chapter.
If you press and hold 9 or : for an
extended period, rapid scroll begins.
Selecting a film/title
This function is only available if the DVD is
divided into several films/tracks. If the DVD
contains several films, these can be selected
directly. A film can be selected either when
the DVD is being played back or when it is
stopped.
The film can also be selected from the menu
on the DVD itself.
X Press W the COMAND controller to show
the menu.
X Select Video-DVD by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press W to
confirm.
A menu appears.
Selecting a video DVD from the media
list
Press W the COMAND controller to show
the menu.
X Select Changer or Media by sliding VÆ and
turning cVd the COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
The media list appears. The # dot indicates the current medium being played.
Video DVDs are indicated by the ý icon.
Equipped with a single DVD drive: press
W the COMAND controller.
COMAND loads the video DVD and begins
playing it.
Equipped with a DVD changer: press W
the COMAND controller to display all magazine trays.
X Select a video DVD by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
COMAND loads the video DVD and begins
playing it.
i If you select a CD, an audio DVD or an
MP3 medium, you switch to the respective
audio mode. You can find further information about the media list on (Y page 198).
DVD menu
Calling up the DVD menu
DVD function menu
Select Title selection by turning cVd
the COMAND controller and press W to
confirm.
Select a film/title and press W to confirm.
The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD
itself. It is structured in various ways according to the individual DVD and permits certain
actions and settings.
In the case of multi-language DVDs, for example, you can change the DVD language in the
DVD menu.
X In full-screen mode, press W the COMAND
controller to show the menu.
X Select Video-DVD in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Video DVD mode
Select DVD functions and press W to
confirm.
X Select Menu and press W to confirm.
The DVD menu appears.
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
Back to the film
Select any menu item in the DVD menu and
press W the COMAND controller to confirm.
X Select Go up and press W to confirm.
Press the % back button repeatedly
until you see the movie.
or
Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu.
Select the Back (to the movie) menu
item in the menu and press W to confirm.
Setting the language and audio format
To reconfirm your selection: confirm
Select by pressing W.
COMAND executes the action.
Make a selection from the further options,
if necessary.
COMAND then switches back to the DVD
menu.
i Depending on the DVD, the menu items:
Back (to the movie), Play,
Stop, ., / or Go up may not function or not function at certain points in the
DVD menu. To indicate this, the K icon
appears in the display.
Moving up one level in the DVD menu
Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu and press W the COMAND controller to confirm.
This function is not available on all DVDs. If it
is available, you can set the DVD menu language, the audio language or the audio format. The number of settings is determined by
the DVD content. It is possible that the settings may also be accessed in the DVD menu
(Y page 236).
X In full-screen mode, press W the COMAND
controller to show the menu.
X Select Video-DVD in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press W to
confirm.
X Select Menu language or Audio lan‐
guage and press W to confirm.
In both cases, a menu appears after a few
seconds. The # dot in front of an entry
indicates the currently selected language.
X Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
or
Video
Select a menu item by sliding ZVÆ or turning XVY the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
The menu appears.
i Menu items which cannot be selected are
shown in grey.
237
Video AUX operation
238
Video
Subtitles and camera angle
These functions are not available on all DVDs.
The number of subtitle languages and camera
angles available depends on the content of
the DVD. It is possible that the settings may
also be accessed in the DVD menu
(Y page 236).
X In full-screen mode, press W the COMAND
controller to show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press W to
confirm.
X Select Subtitles or Camera angle and
press W to confirm.
In both cases, a menu appears. The # dot
in front of an entry indicates the current
setting.
Select a setting by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
You require an additional audio/video cable
set to connect an external video source to the
Media Interface.
For more details, please contact a MercedesBenz Service Centre or visit http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. Then,
follow the instructions in the "Media Interface" section.
You will find the connection sockets in the
glove compartment.
Audio/video sockets
: Video port (V) (yellow)
; Audio port (L) (white)
= Audio port (R) (red)
Interactive content
DVDs can contain interactive content (e.g. a
video game). In a video game, for example,
you may be able to influence events by selecting and triggering actions. The type and number of actions depend on the DVD.
X Select an action by sliding ZVÆ or XVY the
COMAND controller and press W to execute it.
A menu appears and the first entry,
Select, is highlighted.
X Press W the COMAND controller.
Video AUX operation
Connecting external video sources
If your vehicle is equipped with a Media Interface, you can connect an external video
source.
i To facilitate correct playback, it may be
necessary to set a suitable video standard
in the external video source.
Connect the external device to corresponding port :, ; or =.
COMAND activates the device.
Switching on video AUX mode
Select Video in the main function bar by
sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
If video AUX mode was the last mode selected, it will now be active.
Picture viewer
i It may be the case that a device which is
connected as an external video source
seems quieter or louder in the vehicle, or
that the usual maximum volume cannot be
reached. On some devices, it is possible to
adjust the volume separately. In this case,
start at a medium volume and increase it
gradually. This enables you to determine
whether the system is able to play the
sound at high volume without distorting it.
Increasing the volume using COMAND
Select Volume in the AUX display by turning
cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the
current setting.
Select Standard or Boost and press W to
confirm.
Standard: the volume of the external video
source is adjusted to a standard value.
Boost: the volume of the external video
source is raised by approximately 10 dB.
Video AUX mode
For details on how to operate the external
video source, see the respective device's
operating instructions.
Showing/hiding the menu
To show: press W the COMAND controller.
X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller
and confirm Full screen by pressing W.
Volume and sound settings
You will find details on volume (Y page 30)
and sound (Y page 31) settings in the "At a
glance" section.
G Risk of accident
External video sources may have different volumes, which can mean that system messages
such as traffic announcements and navigation
system announcements are much louder. If
necessary, please deactivate the system messages or adjust their volume manually.
Picture viewer
Introduction
If there are pictures on the active data
medium, you can look at them.
Data medium
Supported picture
formats
CD/DVD with picture files
jpeg, jpg
USB devices (sticks, jpeg, jpg
hard drives)
SD memory card:
Calling up a category list
Select a data medium (e.g. memory card)
with pictures in the audio menu
Video
If another video source is switched on, you
can now switch to video AUX mode in the
video menu.
X Select Video and press W to confirm.
X Select Aux and press W to confirm.
The video AUX menu appears. You will hear
and see the content of the external video
source if it is connected and switched to
playback.
239
Picture viewer
240
(Y page 186) or in the media list
(Y page 198).
Select Search in the basic display by sliding VÆ and turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The category list appears.
Changing the picture view
Press W the COMAND controller.
A menu appears.
To turn the picture clockwise: confirm
Turn clockwise by pressing W the
COMAND controller.
To turn the picture anti-clockwise:
select Turn anti-clockwise by turning
the cVd COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Video
Displaying pictures
Select (Y page 205)Photos in the category
list by turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
A folder directory appears.
Select a folder with photos and press W to
confirm.
The folder displays the existing picture files
(example).
To zoom into a picture: select Zoom by
turning the cVd COMAND controller and
press W to confirm.
After you have zoomed into the picture, you
can move the section of the picture.
X Slide ZVÆXVY the COMAND controller.
Select a photo and press W to confirm.
The photo is displayed and the music is
stopped.
To return to the original size: press W
the COMAND controller.
Exiting the picture viewer
Select Back to menu in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press
W to confirm.
Picture viewer
241
Video
To start playing music: confirm Search
by pressing W.
The category list appears (Y page 205).
X Select a category by turning cVd the
COMAND controller and press W to confirm.
X Select other entries within the category
(e.g. track, album) until the music starts
playing.
242
Vehicle equipment ............................
General information .........................
Basic functions .................................
System settings ................................
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........
TV mode .............................................
Video DVD mode ...............................
Active COMAND source mode .........
AUX mode ..........................................
244
244
245
247
248
253
257
262
264
Rear Seat Entertainment System
243
Rear Seat Entertainment System
244
General information
Vehicle equipment
On the remote control
i These Operating Instructions describe all
standard and optional equipment available
for your vehicle at the time it was purchased. Please note that your vehicle may
not be equipped with all features described.
General information
Changing batteries
Notes
Batteries are required for the remote control
and for the two sets of cordless headphones.
G Risk of injury
Keep batteries away from children. Consult a
doctor immediately if a child should swallow
a battery.
Do not dismantle, short-circuit or burn a battery.
H Environmental note
Dispose of used batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.
: Battery compartment
; Catch tab
= Battery compartment cover
? Retaining lugs
A Batteries
The remote control contains 2 type AAA,
1.5 V batteries.
X To open the battery compartment:
remove battery compartment cover = on
the back of the remote control.
X To do so, press down retaining lug ; and
take off battery compartment cover =.
X Remove discharged batteries A from the
tray.
X
Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity markings on the batteries and battery
compartment when doing so.
Left-hand battery: The positive pole (+)
must face upwards.
Right-hand battery The positive pole (+)
must face downwards.
X To close the battery compartment:
insert battery compartment cover = starting with retaining lugs ? into the battery
compartment and allow catch tab ; to
engage in place.
Right-hand battery The positive pole (+)
must face downwards.
X To close the battery compartment:
press battery compartment cover downwards until it engages into place.
If the batteries have been inserted correctly, the indicator lamp will light up green
when the headphones are switched on.
On the cordless headphones
You can use the cordless headphones supplied and/or up to two sets of corded headphones connected to the corresponding jack
of the rear-compartment screens
(Y page 35).
The following information can be found in the
"Cordless headphones" section:
The battery compartment cover is located on
the left headphone.
Basic functions
Operating with headphones
Rswitching
the wireless headphones on/off
(Y page 38).
Radjusting the headphone volume
(Y page 38).
Rselecting a screen for the headphones
(Y page 38).
: Battery compartment cover
The wireless headphones contain 2 type AAA,
1.5 V batteries.
X To open the battery compartment: flip
battery compartment cover : upwards.
As you do so, hold the left-hand side of the
headphones as shown to prevent the batteries from falling out.
X Remove the discharged batteries from the
tray.
X Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity markings on the batteries and battery
compartment when doing so.
Left-hand battery: The positive pole (+)
must face upwards.
Using the main loudspeakers
This function is available in conjunction with
COMAND.
You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to listen to a disc inserted in the rear-compartment
drive. To do so, at least one of the rear-compartment screens must be set to disc mode.
X Setting using COMAND: press, for example, the $ function button to switch on
an audio mode.
X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
The Audio menu appears.
X Select Rear by turning cVd the COMAND
controller and press W to confirm.
245
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Basic functions
Rear Seat Entertainment System
246
Basic functions
i The headphones' volume setting does not
affect the main loudspeakers.
The following functions affect only one
screen:
Raudio and video functions as well as picture
Adjusting the sound settings
You can select the sound settings in the audio
CD/DVD/MP3, TV, video DVD and AUX
modes.
X Switch on an operating mode (e.g. audio
CD mode) (Y page 249).
X Select Treble or Bass using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Multiple users
Simultaneous use of the rear-compartment disc drive
The two rear-compartment screens can be
operated almost entirely independently from
one another. However, there can be a conflict
in some menus if the two screens are used
simultaneously.
If the rear-compartment disc drive is being
used for both screens simultaneously, selecting certain menus or settings on one of the
screens also affects the other screen.
The following functions affect both screens:
Rchanging
playback options
Rselecting a track (from a track list or folder)
Rusing the play, pause and stop functions
Rfast forward/rewind or scrolling
Rcalling up the DVD menu and navigating
within it
Rsetting the language, subtitles and camera
angle
Rcalling up interactive DVD content
settings
Rswitching
between full screen and the
menu
Switching between operating modes
When you exit an operating mode (e.g. audio
CD mode), the current setting is saved. If you
call up this operating mode again later, there
are two possibilities:
Rthe
operating mode has been changed on
the other screen.
Rthe operating mode has not been changed.
In the first case, the operating mode appears
as it is on the other screen.
In the second case, the setting appears on the
screen as it was when you last exited the
operating mode.
Picture settings
Overview
You can select these settings in TV, video
DVD and AUX mode. Instructions for AUX
mode are detailed later (Y page 264).
Adjusting the brightness, contrast and
colour
Switch on TV mode (Y page 227) or video
DVD mode (Y page 257).
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
X Select Menu while the navigation menu
(Y page 227) is shown and press the 9
button to confirm.
In both cases, select TV or Video-DVD
using the :=; buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
the other screen. You make these settings
using the remote control (Y page 36).
Selecting the display language
TV mode (example)
: Brightness, contrast and colour
; Picture formats
Select Brightness, Contrast or Colour
using the 9: buttons and press the
9 button to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
Select a setting using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Select Settings using the : button
and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Language using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The list of languages appears. The # dot
indicates the current setting.
Changing the picture format
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
Select Menu while the navigation menu
(Y page 227) is shown and press the 9
button to confirm.
Select TV or DVD-V using
the :=; buttons and press the
9 button to confirm.
The dot in front of one of the menu items
16:9 optimised, 4:3 or Widescreen indicates the format currently selected.
Select a format using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Select System using the 9=;
button on the remote control and press
9 to confirm.
You see the system menu on the selected
rear screen.
Select a language using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System activates the respective language.
Switching the display design
Select Settings in the system menu using
the : button on the remote control and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Day design, Night design or
Automatic using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
The dot indicates the current setting.
Design
Explanation
Day design
The display is set permanently to day
design.
Night design
The display is set permanently to night
design.
Automatic
The display design
changes depending on
the vehicle instrument
cluster illumination.
System settings
Note
You can adjust almost all system settings
individually for each screen without affecting
247
Rear Seat Entertainment System
System settings
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
248
Setting the brightness
Select Settings in the system menu using
the : button on the remote control and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Brightness using the 9:
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
A scale appears.
Adjust the brightness using the 9:
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The brightness bar moves up or down. The
picture becomes lighter or darker in
accordance with the scale.
General notes
You will find information on the following topics in the Audio section:
on CDs/DVDs (Y page 205)
on MP3 mode (Y page 203)
Rnotes on copyright (Y page 204)
Rnotes
Rnotes
Inserting a CD/DVD
Showing/hiding the picture
To hide the picture: select Display off
in the system menu using the :;
buttons on the remote control and press
the 9 button to confirm.
The picture is hidden.
To display the picture: press the 9 button.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Safety note
G Risk of injury
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
You must not open the casing. There is a risk
of exposure to invisible laser radiation if the
casing is opened, or if the casing is faulty or
damaged.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System contains
no parts which you can repair yourself. For
safety reasons, all maintenance work must be
carried out by qualified aftersales technicians.
: Disc slot
; Eject button
The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. If
there is already a disc inserted, this must be
ejected before another is inserted.
Insert a disc into the disc slot.
The printed side of the disc must face
upwards. If neither side of the disc is printed, the side you wish to play must face
downwards.
The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc.
The CD/DVD drive plays the disc:
Rif
it has been inserted correctly and is a
permissible disc, and
Rafter you have switched on disc mode
(audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 mode)
(Y page 249).
Data on an MP3 CD first needs to be loaded
by the drive. Loading may take a some time,
depending on the number of folders and
tracks.
Removing a CD/DVD
Press the þ eject button.
The drive ejects the disc.
X Take the disc out of the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot,
the drive will draw it in again automatically
after a short while.
Audio CD mode (example)
: Type of data medium _
; Track number
= Track name (only if stored on the disc as
CD text)
? Track time
A Graphic time and track display
B Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
C To set the bass
Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or
MP3 mode
Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 248).
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
the inserted disc.
X Select Disc in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The corresponding mode is switched on.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System plays
the disc.
D To set the treble
E Disc name (if stored on the disc as CD
text)
F To call up the track list
G Playback options
Audio DVD mode (example)
: Type of data medium ü
; Track number
= Track name (if stored on the disc)
? Track time
A Graphic time and track display
B Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
249
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
250
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
C To set the bass
D To set the treble
E Disc name (if stored on the disc)
F To call up the track list
Selecting a track
Selecting by skipping to a track
G Stop function
H Pause function
I Playback options
MP3 mode (example)
: Type of data medium þ
; Track number
= Track name
? Track time
A Graphic time and track display
B Current playback settings (no symbol for
"Normal track sequence")
C To set the bass
D To set the treble
E Disc name or current folder
F To call up the folder list
G Playback options, to switch track infor-
mation on/off
i Variable bit rates in MP3 tracks can result
in the elapsed time shown being different
to the actual elapsed time.
To skip forwards or backwards to a
track: press the = or ; button on
the remote control.
or
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
Skipping backwards restarts the current
track (if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds) or starts the previous track
(if the current track has only been playing
for a shorter time).
If you have selected the playback options
Random tracks or Random folder, the
track order is random.
Selecting by track list
In audio CD mode, the track list contains all
tracks on the disc currently playing.
In audio DVD mode, the track list contains all
tracks in the currently active group; see "Setting the audio format" (Y page 202).
In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracks
in the currently active folder as well as the
folder structure, allowing you to select any
track on the MP3 CD.
X Select Track list (audio CD/DVD mode)
or Folder (MP3 mode) using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
or
X Press the 9 button when the display/
selection window is selected.
The track list appears. The # dot indicates
the current track.
Select a track using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
Making a selection by entering the track
number directly
Press the h button on the remote control.
The track entry display appears.
Example: track 2
Press the · number button.
Example: track 12
Press the corresponding number keys in
rapid succession.
i It is not possible to enter numbers that
exceed the number of tracks on the CD or
in the currently active folder.
X Wait for approximately three seconds after
making the entry.
You will hear the track which has been
entered. The corresponding basic menu
then reappears.
: Folder selection symbol
; Current folder name
= Track symbol
To switch to the superordinate folder:
select icon : using the 9: buttons
on the remote control and press the 9
button to confirm.
The display shows the next folder up.
Fast forward/rewind
With the display/selection window active,
press the = or ; button on the
remote control repeatedly until you reach
the desired position.
or
Press and hold the E or F button
until the desired position is reached.
: Folder selection symbol
; Folder icon
Selecting a folder
This function is only available in MP3 mode.
X Select Folder in MP3 mode using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
or
X Press the 9 button when the display/
selection window is selected.
The folder content appears.
Select a folder using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
You will see the tracks in the folder.
X Select a track using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
The track is played and the corresponding
folder is now the active folder.
Pause function
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
251
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
252
To pause playback: select Ë using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ì display changes to Ë.
Stop function
This function is only available in audio DVD
mode.
X To interrupt playback: select É using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
X To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press the
9 button to confirm.
Playback stops and returns to the beginning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.
To restart playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
DVD.
Setting the audio format
Further information on audio formats is available in the "Audio" section (Y page 202).
X Select DVD-A using the :=;
buttons on the remote control and press
9 to confirm.
X Select Group using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
The list of available audio formats appears.
The # dot indicates the format currently
selected.
Select an audio format using the
9: buttons and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X To exit the menu: press the =
or ; button.
Playback options
Further information on playback options is
available in the "Audio" section
(Y page 203).
X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The options list appears. The # dot indicates the option currently selected.
Select Normal track sequence, Random
tracks or Random folder using the
9: buttons and press the 9 button
to confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal track sequence, you will
see a corresponding display in the display/
selection window.
i If you change the disc, the Normal
track sequence option is activated automatically. If an option is selected, it
remains selected after the Rear Seat Entertainment System is switched on or off.
Switching track information on/off
(MP3 mode only)
If the function is switched on, folder and track
names are displayed.
If the function is switched off, disc and file
names are displayed.
X Select MP3 using the :=; buttons on the remote control and press the
9 button to confirm.
X
Select Display track information
using the 9: buttons and press the
9 button to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
= Current programme (digital TV receiver
only)
? Next TV channel in the channel list (chan-
nel name or number)
A To show the menu
B Previous TV channel in the channel list
(channel name or number)
TV mode
General information
Further information on channel reception
quality can be found in the "Video" section
(Y page 227).
Switching to TV mode
Select TV using the 9=; buttons on the remote control and press the
9 button to confirm.
You see the last TV channel selected, provided it can still be received.
Showing/hiding the menu
To show: press the 9 button on the
remote control.
or
Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
X To hide: press the 9 button, select
Full screen and press the 9 button to
confirm.
Hiding/showing the navigation menu
To show: press the 9 or : button
on the remote control.
To hide: press the 9 or : button.
or
Wait for approximately eight seconds.
Menu shown
: To call up the TV options menu
; To call up the channel presets
= Information on the current programme
(only for digital TV channels)
? To switch on teletext
A To set the treble
B To set the bass
Navigation menu displayed
: Preset position of the selected TV channel
; Selected TV channel
253
Rear Seat Entertainment System
TV mode
TV mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
254
Selecting TV channels
Selecting channels from the navigation
menu
Press the = or ; button on the
remote control while the display window is
active.
or
Press the E or F button.
The TV tuner selects the previous or next
channel from the alphabetical channel list.
Selecting channels via the channel presets
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
Select Presets using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The station preset memory appears. The
# dot indicates where the selected channel is currently stored.
Channel presets
Select a channel using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
or
Press a number button.
Selecting a channel from the channel
list
Notes on the channel list can be found in the
"Video" section (Y page 228). Information
regarding COMAND also applies to the Rear
Seat Entertainment System.
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
X Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
Select TV using the =; buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Station list and press the 9
button to confirm.
The channel list appears. The # dot in
front of a list entry indicates the currently
selected channel. A number before the list
entry shows the memory slot in the channel
presets.
Select a channel using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Selecting channels by entering the
channel and programme number
Several programmes can be transmitted on
one channel with digital TV. You can therefore
enter a channel and the desired programme
on this channel.
Only one programme can be sent on a channel with analogue TV. The programme entry
function therefore has no effect.
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
X Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
Option 1: select TV using the =;
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Select Channel entry and press the 9
button to confirm.
X
Option 2: press the h button while the
TV is playing.
Irrespective of the option, an input bar
appears at the top of the screen.
To set a channel: enter the channel number using the number keys and press the
9 button to confirm.
Press and hold the number key until the
entry line is hidden.
The channel is set.
Storing channels automatically
or
i If you have not entered a programme
number, the first programme with adequate reception will be set for a digital
channel.
i You can enter channels or programmes
available in your country even if the reception is currently not adequate.
If you enter channels which are not intended for your country or are not allowed
there, the Invalid channel number message appears.
Press the 9 button and confirm the message.
Storing TV channels
Storing channels manually
There are ten preset positions available.
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the navigation
menu is shown.
Select Presets using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The station preset memory appears. The
# dot indicates under which preset the
currently selected channel is stored.
To store a channel: select a preset using
the 9: buttons and press and hold
the 9 button until you hear a tone.
or
Press and hold a number button until you
hear a tone.
Then, the TV picture reappears.
This function automatically stores channels
with adequate reception in order of their
reception quality. Any channels stored manually in the preset memory will be lost.
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the navigation
menu is shown.
Select Presets using the =; buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Autostore and press the 9 button
to confirm.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System
searches for channels it can receive. The
available channels are automatically stored
in the preset positions.
Information about the current programme
This function is only available on digital TV
channels. If you are watching an analogue TV
channel, this menu cannot be selected.
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the navigation
menu is shown.
Select Info using the =; buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
If the current TV channel provides the corresponding information, this will be displayed.
i It can take a few seconds for the information to be displayed.
255
Rear Seat Entertainment System
TV mode
TV mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
256
Displaying the current programme or
programme preview
This function is only available on digital TV
channels. The programme preview is also
referred to as the electronic programme
guide (EPG).
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the navigation
menu is shown.
Select TV using the =; buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Station list and press the 9
button to confirm.
The channel list appears. It shows the current programme on the digital TV channels
with adequate reception. The # dot in
front of a list entry indicates the currently
selected channel.
: TV channel
; Next programme
= To display the current programme
? The beginning and end of the programme
To show the current programme: select
Display current programme and press
the 9 button to confirm.
X To close the display: press the % button.
Basic TV settings
Fixing the frequency
: Current TV channel
; To display the programme preview
= Current programme
? Visual display of the elapsed programme
time
To show the programme preview: select
Display programme preview and press
the 9 button to confirm.
The channel list shows the channel's next
programme.
Further information on this function is available in the "Video" section (Y page 231).
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the navigation
menu is shown.
Select TV using the =; buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Channel fix and press the 9 button to confirm.
Depending on the previous status, the function is switched on O or off ª. When the
function is switched on, FIX appears in the
display window.
X To exit the menu: press the =
or ; button.
Setting the reception region
Selecting a teletext page
Further information on this function is available in the "Video" section (Y page 232).
X To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control or confirm Menu by
pressing the 9 button while the navigation
menu is shown.
Select TV using the =; buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select TV standard and press the 9 button to confirm.
A list appears, showing the reception
regions. The # dot in front of a list entry
indicates the currently selected reception
area or country.
X Select the reception area and press the
9 button to confirm.
A message appears to inform you that if the
wrong country is set, correct reception will
not be possible.
X Select Yes or No and press the 9 button
to confirm.
If you select Yes, the Rear Seat Entertainment System switches the country.
If you select No, the country list will appear
again.
Teletext
Switching teletext on/off
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
To select a page directly: press the corresponding number keys on the remote
control.
i You can only enter pages that are permissible for teletext between 100 and 899.
X To call up the next/previous page: press
the 9 or : button.
Dynamic teletext page
A dynamic teletext page consists of several
subpages. The display automatically changes
to the next page after a certain time.
Video DVD mode
General notes
Here you will find further information on the
following topics:
Rsafety
Rnotes
notes (Y page 192)
on DVDs (Y page 232)
DVD playback conditions
There may be playback problems when playing copied discs. There are a large variety of
discs, DVD authoring software, writing software and writers available. This variety means
that there is no guarantee that the Rear Seat
Entertainment System will be able to play
video DVDs that you have copied yourself.
You will find further information in the Video
section (Y page 233). Information regarding
COMAND also applies to the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
To switch on: select Teletext using the
=; buttons and press the 9 button
to confirm.
The first video text page is displayed.
X To switch off: press the % back button.
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, it is possible that certain functions or actions described in this
section will be temporarily blocked or may not
function at all. As soon as you try to activate
257
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Video DVD mode
Video DVD mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
258
these functions or actions, you will see the
K symbol in the display.
Inserting and removing a CD/DVD
Proceed as described in the "Audio CD/
DVD and MP3 mode" section
(Y page 248).
Activating video DVD mode
Insert a video DVD.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
the disc.
If disc mode was the last mode selected, it
will now be active.
If it was not, switch on video DVD mode as
described in the following instruction.
X Select Disc in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
If the video DVD fulfils the playback criteria:
the film either starts automatically or the
menu saved on the DVD appears. If the
DVD menu appears, you must start the film
manually.
X Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu.
Navigation menu
: Data medium type
; Current track
= Current scene
? Track time
A To show the menu
Showing/hiding the menu
To show: press the 9 button on the
remote control.
or
Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
To hide: press the 9 button, select
Full screen and press the 9 button to
confirm.
Hiding/showing the navigation menu
To show: press the 9 or : button
on the remote control.
To hide: press the 9 or : button.
or
Wait for approximately eight seconds.
Menu system
: Video DVD options
; Pause function
= Stop function
? To set the treble
A To set the bass
Fast forward/rewind
Press and hold the E or F button on
the remote control until the desired position has been reached.
You see the navigation menu.
Pause function
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
To interrupt playback: select É and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The
video image is hidden.
X To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted. The menu is hidden.
X To stop playback: while playback is interrupted, select É again and press the
9 button to confirm.
Playback stops and returns to the beginning of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.
or
Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
To pause playback: select Ë and press
the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The menu is hidden.
To restart playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
DVD.
Selecting a scene/chapter
Note
Further information on this function is available in the "Video" section (Y page 235).
Skipping forwards/backwards
Stop function
To show the menu: press the 9 button
on the remote control.
or
Select Menu while the navigation menu is
shown and press the 9 button to confirm.
Press the = or ; button on the
remote control.
or
Press the E or F button.
The navigation menu (Y page 227) appears
for approximately eight seconds.
Selecting a scene/chapter directly
The examples illustrate how to select scene/
chapter 5.
X Option 1: while the film is playing, press
the h button on the remote control.
X Press the corresponding number key, such
as ¿.
259
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Video DVD mode
Video DVD mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
260
Option 2: while the film is playing, press
the 9 button on the remote control and
show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press the 9
button to confirm.
X Select Scene selection and press the
9 button to confirm.
X Select 5 using the 9 or : button and
press the 9 button to confirm.
In both cases, playback will begin from the
fifth scene/chapter after a brief pause.
Option 2:
Example: selecting film 2
X Press the · button.
After a brief pause, the second film is
played.
DVD menu
Note
You will find further information on the DVD
menu in the "Video" section (Y page 236).
Calling up the DVD menu
Selecting a film/title
Note
Further information on this function is available in the "Video" section (Y page 236).
Option 1
Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button
on the remote control to confirm.
Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X Select Video-DVD and press the 9 button
on the remote control to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press the 9
button to confirm.
X Select Menu and press the 9 button to
confirm.
The DVD menu appears.
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
Select a menu item using the
9:=; buttons on the
remote control and press the 9 button to
confirm.
A menu appears.
i Menu items which cannot be selected are
shown in grey.
Select DVD functions and press the 9
button to confirm.
X Select Title selection and press the
9 button to confirm.
X To call up the selection list: press the
9 button.
X Select a film/track.
X
Confirm Select by pressing the 9 button.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System executes the action or shows a submenu.
X If available, additional options can now be
selected.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System then
switches back to the DVD menu.
i Depending on the DVD, the menu items:
Back (to the movie), Play,
Stop, ., / or Go up may not function or not function at certain points in the
DVD menu. To indicate this, the K icon
appears in the display.
Stopping a film or skipping to the beginning or end of a scene
Select any menu item from the DVD menu.
The menu appears.
X To stop the film: select the Stop menu
item and press the 9 button on the remote
control to confirm.
X To skip to the end of a scene: select
the / menu item and press the 9 button to confirm.
X To skip to the beginning of a scene:
select the . menu item and press the
9 button to confirm.
Moving up one level in the DVD menu
Option 1: press the % back button on
the remote control or select the corresponding menu item in the DVD menu.
Option 2: select any menu item in the DVD
menu.
X Select the Go up menu item in the menu
and press the 9 button to confirm.
Back to the film
Option 1: press the % back button on
the remote control repeatedly until you see
the film or select the corresponding menu
item in the DVD menu.
Option 2: select any menu item in the DVD
menu and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select the Back (to the movie) menu
item in the menu and press the 9 button
to confirm.
Setting the audio format
This function is not available on all DVDs. If it
is available, you can set the audio language
or the audio format. The number of settings
is determined by the DVD content. It is possible that the settings may also be accessed
in the DVD menu.
X Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press the 9
button to confirm.
X Select Audio language and press the 9
button to confirm.
A menu appears after a short while. The
# dot in front of an entry indicates the
currently selected language.
X Select a language using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
To exit the menu: press the =
or ; button.
Subtitles and camera angle
These functions are not available on all DVDs.
The number of subtitle languages and camera
angles available depends on the content of
the DVD. It is possible that the settings may
also be accessed in the DVD menu.
X Press the 9 button on the remote control
and show the menu.
X Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button on the remote control to confirm.
X Select DVD functions and press the 9
button to confirm.
261
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Video DVD mode
Active COMAND source mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
262
Select Subtitles or Camera angle and
press the 9 button to confirm.
In both cases, a menu appears after a few
seconds. The # dot in front of an entry
indicates the current setting.
X Select a setting using the 9: buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
A menu appears.
To exit the menu: press the =
or ; button.
Interactive content
DVDs can also contain interactive content
(e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may
be able to influence events by selecting and
triggering actions. The type and number of
actions depend on the DVD.
X Select an action using the
9;:= buttons on the
remote control and press the 9 button to
execute it.
A menu appears and the first entry,
Select, is highlighted.
X Press the 9 button.
Active COMAND source mode
Switching the function on/off in
COMAND
You can transfer an audio or video source
selected in COMAND to the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
i If you subsequently switch modes in
COMAND, the new source will not be transmitted to the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
To switch on the function in COMAND:
switch on the desired audio mode in
COMAND, e.g. CD mode (Y page 196), or
show the menu in video DVD mode
(Y page 51).
X Select the menu item at the bottom left,
e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆ
Select Active audio/video source in
rear and press W to confirm.
In the status bar at the top, you will see the
headphones icon and the _ icon for the
source that has been switched on.
X To switch off the function in COMAND:
switch on the desired audio mode in
COMAND or show the menu in video DVD
mode.
X Select the menu item at the bottom left,
e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by sliding VÆ
and turning cVd the COMAND controller
and press W to confirm.
Select Rear off_ and press W the
COMAND controller to confirm.
Selecting an active COMAND source
in the rear-compartment screen
Loading the active COMAND source
Select COMAND using the 9=;
buttons on the remote control and press
9 to confirm.
The audio or video source selected in
COMAND is loaded in the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
To select a track by skipping to a
track: press the = or ; button on
the remote control.
or
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
Skipping backwards restarts the current
track (if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds) or starts the previous track
(if the current track has only been playing
for a shorter time).
Additional setting option:
Rselecting
the sound settings (Y page 246)
Audio DVD mode
When the loading process is complete, the
audio or video source is set in the Rear Seat
Entertainment System.
If Rear off is activated in COMAND, the
COMAND is off or there is no active
COMAND source message appears.
Audio CD mode
Audio DVD mode (example)
To skip to the next/previous group:
press the : button on the remote control.
X Highlight with the = or ;b or
c button and press 9 to confirm.
i Information on groups can be found in the
"Setting the audio format" section
(Y page 202).
Additional setting option:
CD mode (example)
Rselecting
the sound settings (Y page 246)
263
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Active COMAND source mode
AUX mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
264
MP3 mode
Video DVD mode
MP3 mode (example)
Video DVD mode (example)
To select a track by skipping to a
track: press the = or ; button on
the remote control.
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
Skipping backwards restarts the current
track (if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds) or starts the previous track
(if the current track has only been playing
for a shorter time).
Additional setting options:
or
To select a folder: press the : button
on the remote control.
X Highlight one of the two folder symbols
with the = or ; button and press
9 to confirm.
Depending on your selection, the previous
or next folder is selected and the first track
is played.
Additional setting option:
Rselecting
the sound settings (Y page 246)
To hide a menu: confirm Menu with the
9 button.
The video image is played in full screen
mode.
Rsetting
the brightness, contrast and colour
(Y page 246)
Rchanging the picture format (Y page 247)
Radjusting the sound settings (Y page 246)
AUX mode
Introduction
You can connect one external video source to
each of the displays of the Rear Seat Entertainment System (AUX display) and also one
external video source to the rear-seat CD/
DVD drive (AUX drive) with a sound and picture signal.
Please see the corresponding operating
instructions for information on how to operate the external video source.
For further details about external video sources, please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
back. If no video image is available from the
AUX source connected, you will see an
audio menu.
Connecting AUX equipment
AUX drive
The AUX drive jacks are located on the CD/
DVD drive next to the CD/DVD eject button
(Y page 37).
Display AUX
The AUX display jacks are located on the side
of the screen (Y page 35).
Audio and video connection
Insert the audio plugs for the left and right
signals into the corresponding L and R
jacks.
Insert the video plug into the V jack.
Activating AUX mode
AUX drive
Select Aux in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
The AUX menu appears.
Displaying AUX
Select a screen using the thumbwheel on
the remote control "(Y page 36) until L
REAR" (left-hand screen) or "REAR R" (righthand screen) is highlighted in the window.
X Select Aux in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Source from the AUX menu and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Display Aux and press the 9 button to confirm.
You will see and hear the content of the
video source if it is switched to playback. If
no video image is available from the AUX
source connected, you will see an audio
menu.
Adjusting treble and bass
Select Treble or Bass in the AUX menu
and press the 9 button on the remote
control to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the 9 or :
button and press the 9 button to confirm.
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or
colour
AUX menu
Select Source from the AUX menu and
press the 9 button to confirm.
X Select Disc drive Aux and press the 9
button to confirm.
You will hear and see the content of the
external video source if it is connected to
the CD/DVD drive and switched to play-
Select Display Aux or Disc drive Aux
in the AUX menu and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X Select Brightness, Contrast or Colour
and press the 9 button to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X Select a setting using the 9 or :
button and press the 9 button to confirm.
265
Rear Seat Entertainment System
AUX mode
AUX mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
266
Changing the picture format
Select Display Aux or Disc drive Aux
in the AUX menu and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X Select 16:9 optimised, 4:3 or Wide‐
screen using the 9: buttons and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The dot in front of a menu item indicates
the current setting.
267
268
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the internet on the following websites:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com
http://www.daimler.com
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or
suggestions you may have regarding this
manual to the technical documentation team
at the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: R822, D 70546 Stuttgart,
Germany
Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise
reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.
As at 01.06.2010
É1725840781Z102YËÍ
1725840781Z102
Order no. 6515 6890 02 Part no. 172 584 07 81 Z102 Edition NA 2011/03a
Nur für internen Gebrauch / For internal use only

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract
Page Count                      : 272
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Language                        : EN
Title                           : ÿþy
Author                          : Owner: y.io.creator
Keywords                        : Stylesheet-Version, 3.1.1.8, (SAXON, 8.9, from, Saxonica)
Creator                         : XSL Formatter V4.3 MR8a (4,3,2009,0731) for Windows
Producer                        : Antenna House PDF Output Library 2.6.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2010:09:07 16:42:29+01:00
Modify Date                     : 2010:09:07 16:42:29+01:00

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools